PROJECT INDIGO 800 BTPK - SHREWSBURY
Project Manual June 21, 2021
HDG Project No. 20021B
401-658-4600 www.hartcompanies.com R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 01 10 00 Summary of Work Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements Section 01 74 00 Warranties and Bonds Section 02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition Section 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing Section 03 39 00 Concrete Curing Section 03 60 00 Grouting Section 05 05 19 Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing Section 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Section 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Section 07 53 24 Elastomeric Membrane Roofing – Mechanically Attached Section 07 84 00 Firestopping Section 08 11 03 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware Section 08 80 00 Glazing Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies Section 09 51 13 Acoustical Ceiling System Section 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring Section 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring Section 09 67 16 Resinous Floor System
Hart Design Group Table of Contents Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\TABLE OF CONTENTS.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
Section 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating Section 10 14 00 Signage Section 10 26 13 Wall and Corner Guards Section 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties Section 12 36 00 Metal Laboratory Casework Section 26 05 03 Equipment Wiring Connections Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductor and Cables Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices Section 26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers Section 26 24 16 Panelboards Section 26 27 16 Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices Section 26 28 19 Enclosed Switches Section 26 28 23 Enclosed Circuit Breakers Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting Section 26 52 00 Emergency Lighting Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems Section 27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Section 27 05 33 Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems Section 27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communications Systems Section 27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems Section 27 13 43 Communications Services Cabling Section 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm Section 31 05 13 Soils for Earthwork Section 31 23 16 Excavation Section 31 23 23 Fill
Hart Design Group Table of Contents Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\TABLE OF CONTENTS.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
Section 32 91 13 Soil Preparation
Hart Design Group Table of Contents Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\TABLE OF CONTENTS.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Contract description. 2. Work by Owner or other Work at the Site. 3. Owner-furnished products. 4. Contractor's use of Site and premises. 5. Owner occupancy. 6. Permits. 7. Specification conventions.
1.2 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION This project proposes to create seven (7) new labs with associated utilities for a Cytiva Research & Development (R & D) service group, in addition to providing support and administrative work areas for those lab technicians. There is no additional building area or adjustment to the building’s height necessary to accommodate the work.
Project scope includes the demolition of existing architectural finishes including lab casework, countertops & lab equipment, wall partitions, flooring & acoustical ceiling systems, as well as electrical, plumbing, and mechanical items indicated. The reconfigured space will incorporate new wall partitions, sheet & resinous flooring systems with integral cove base, carpet tile, acoustical & clean room-type ceiling systems, new and/or supplemental lighting fixtures, electrical devices, plumbing fixtures, HVAC modifications, as well as ten (10) workstations with storage components, one (1) private office, one (1) quiet room, and one (1) small conference area. Perform all work of
A. Perform all work of Contract under a FIXED COST CONTRACT with the Owner (Cytiva).
1.3 WORK BY OWNER OR OTHERS
A. Work under this Contract includes: 1. Work as indicated on Contract Drawings.
B. Owner will remove any miscellaneous stored items within the existing work areas as occurs prior to the commencement of any selective demolition or construction of new work.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Limit use of Site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Owner.
Hart Design Group Summary of Work Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 10 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 10 00 - Summary of Work, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Means of Egress exits during Construction: Maintain full access to all required Means of Egress at the 800 BTPK facility for the entirety of this Contract.
C. Construction Operations: 1. Disruptive Operations: Co-ordinate and schedule such operations with Owner to minimize disruptions.
D. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Coordinate and schedule electrical and other utility outages with Owner. 2. Outages: Allowed only at previously agreed upon times as the facility is occupied 24/7. 3. At least one (1) week before scheduled outage, submit Outage Request Plan to Owner itemizing the dates, times, and duration of each requested outage.
E. Construction Plan: Before start of construction, provide the Owner and Architect/Engineer with an electronic file of the construction plan regarding access to Work, use of Site, and utility outages for acceptance. This plan may be developed/modified as the project progresses and once the Contractor is more familiar with the site and working conditions.
1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Schedule and substantially complete designated portions of the Work for occupancy before Substantial Completion of the entire Work. 1. Owner intends to occupy the new spaces as soon as is practical prior to completion of the entire Contract. 2. Owner's use and occupancy of designated areas before Substantial Completion of the entire Project do not relieve Contractor of responsibility to maintain specified insurance coverages on a one hundred percent (100%) basis until date of Final Payment.
B. Owner will occupy the facility during entire period of construction for the conduct of its normal operations.
C. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.
D. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.
1.6 PERMITS
Furnish all necessary permits for construction of Work including the following: 1. Building Permit. 2. Plumbing Permit. 3. Mechanical Permit. 4. Electrical Permit. 5. Fire Protection Permit.
Hart Design Group Summary of Work Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 10 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 10 00 - Summary of Work, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.7 SPECIFICATION CONVENTIONS
A. These Specifications are written in imperative mood and streamlined form. This imperative language is directed to Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. The words "shall be" are included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Summary of Work Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 10 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 10 00 - Summary of Work, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovation – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittal procedures.
B. Construction progress schedules.
C. Proposed products list.
D. Product data.
E. Shop drawings.
F. Test reports.
G. Certificates.
H. Manufacturer's instructions.
I. Manufacturer's field reports.
1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Transmit each submittal with Architect/Engineer on an accepted form.
B. Sequentially number Transmittals. Mark revised submittals with original number and sequential alphabetic suffix.
C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier, pertinent drawing and detail number, and Specification Section Number appropriate to submittal(s).
D. Apply Contractor's Stamp “signed or initialed” certifying that review, approval, & verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent work, and coordination of information is in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project. Deliver all submittals to Hart Design Group, Ltd., 800 Scenic View Drive, Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864. Coordinate submission of related items.
F. For each submittal, allow minimum five (5) business days, excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
Hart Design Group Submittal Procedures Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 33 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovation – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
G. Identify deviations from Contract Documents, as well as product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work.
H. Allow space on submittals for both Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps.
I. When revised for re-submission, identify and highlight changes made since previous submission.
J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with project requirements.
K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit initial schedules within fifteen (15) business days after date established in Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within five (5) business days.
B. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment.
C. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties.
D. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules.
E. Revisions To Schedules: 1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. 2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. 3. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect, including effect of changes on schedules of separate contractors.
1.4 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within fifteen (15) business days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards.
Hart Design Group Submittal Procedures Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 33 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovation – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.5 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit Product Data: to Architect/Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
B. Submit one (1) copy of all submittals electronically; Architect/Engineer will provide appropriate e-mail address for submitting Transmittals upon Contract Award. Each submittal is to be accompanied by a “Letter of Transmittal” indicating date submitted, contents of the submittal, specification section number referenced, and directions for the return of the reviewed submittal (e-mail address).
C. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
D. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
E. After review, the redlined submittals will be distributed to all parties electronically along with a submittal review form showing the status of the submittal.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect/Engineer for their review, limited in purpose, to checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed within the Contract Documents.
B. Submit one (1) copy of all submittals electronically; Architect/Engineer will provide appropriate e-mail address for submittal transmittal upon award of the contract. Each submittal is to be accompanied by a letter of transmittal indicating the date submitted, contents of the submittal, specification section number referenced, and directions for the return of the reviewed submittal (e-mail address).
C. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
D. After review, the redlined submittals will be distributed to all parties electronically along with a submittal review form showing the status of the submittal.
1.7 TEST REPORTS
A. Test reports shall be submitted electronically.
B. Submit for Architect/Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator for the Owner.
Hart Design Group Submittal Procedures Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 33 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovation – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Submit test reports to the Architect/Engineer for their review, limited in purpose, to assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
1.8 CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect/Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate that material or product conforms to, or exceeds, the specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates must be recent, but may document previous test results on material or Product if acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
1.9 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect/Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
1.10 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD REPORTS
A. Submit reports for Architect/Engineer's benefit as contract administrator for the Owner.
B. Submit report in duplicate within fifteen (15) business days of observation to Architect/Engineer for their information.
C. Submit information to the Architect/Engineer for their review, limited in purpose, to assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. NOT USED.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. NOT USED.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Submittal Procedures Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 33 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovation – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality Control and Control of Installation.
B. Tolerances
C. References.
D. Testing and inspection services.
E. Manufacturers' field services.
F. Examination.
G. Preparation.
1.2 QUALITYCONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over Suppliers, Manufacturers, Products, Services, site conditions and workmanship to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with all Manufacturers' Instructions, including step sequencing.
C. When Manufacturers' Instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where tolerances that are more stringent, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or workmanship that is more precise.
E. Perform all Work with persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by the Manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.
1.3 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
Hart Design Group Quality Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 40 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovation – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Comply with all Manufacturers' tolerances. When Manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. For products or workmanship specified by Association, Trades, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard (including FM Global) except when requirements that are more rigid are specified or required by applicable Codes and Regulations.
B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, except where another more specific date is established by Code or Regulation.
C. Obtain copies of standards where required by Product specification.
D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
E. No contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of parties in this Contract, or those of Architect/Engineer, shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference documents.
1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
A. Owner will employ, and pay for, specified services of an independent firm to perform testing and inspection that may be required.
B. The independent firm will perform tests, inspections, and other services specified in individual specification sections as required by Architect/Engineer and will provide as required:
1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate at Project location. 2. Laboratory Staff: With full-time Registered Engineer on staff to review services. 3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.
C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on, or off, project site. However, the performance of off-site project testing is to be as required by Architect/Engineer or Owner.
Hart Design Group Quality Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 40 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovation – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. Independent firm to Architect/Engineer and Contractor, in duplicate, indicating observations, results of tests, and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents, will submit reports.
E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm forty-eight (48) hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Arrange with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use.
F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
G. Same independent firm on instructions by Architect/Engineer shall perform re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements. Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract Sum/Price.
H. Agency Responsibilities: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests required by Architect/Engineer. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.
I. Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit electronic copies of report to Architect/Engineer and to Contractor. When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. Include the following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and specifications section. 6. Location in Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Results of tests. 10. Conformance with Contract Documents.
Hart Design Group Quality Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 40 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovation – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
J. Limits On Testing Authority: 1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. 4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.6 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer.
C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
D. Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, Manufacturer’s Field Reports article.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. NOT USED.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning of the Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
Hart Design Group Quality Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 40 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovation – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply Manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Quality Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 40 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Products.
B. Product delivery requirements.
C. Product storage and handling requirements.
D. Product options.
E. Product substitution procedures.
F. Equipment electrical characteristics and components.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Furnish products of qualified Manufacturers suitable for intended use. Furnish products of each type by single Manufacturer unless specified otherwise.
B. Do not use any materials or equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.
C. Furnish interchangeable components from same Manufacturer for components being replaced.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
Hart Design Group Product Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 60 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 60 00 - Product Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Store sensitive Products in weather-tight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to Product.
D. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports above ground.
E. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of Products.
F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.
G. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
H. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of one of Manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Provision for Substitutions: Submit request for substitution for any Manufacturer not named in accordance with the following Article.
1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Architect/Engineer will consider requests for Substitutions only within ten (10) calendar days prior to submission of Contract Bid.
B. Substitutions will be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.
C. Document each request with complete data to substantiate compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents.
D. A request constitutes a representation that Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds quality level of specified product. 2. Will provide same warranty for Substitution as for specified Product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
Hart Design Group Product Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 60 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 60 00 - Product Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect/Engineer for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by the AHJ (Authorities Having Jurisdiction).
E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated, or implied, on Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals, without a separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents.
F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three (3) copies of Request for Substitution for consideration; limit each request to one (1) proposed Substitution. 2. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and certified test results attesting to proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on entity proposing the substitution. 3. Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor, in writing, of his/her decision to Accept, Reject, or Request/Revise.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. NOT USED.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. NOT USED.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Product Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 60 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 60 00 - Product Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Field engineering.
B. Closeout procedures.
C. Starting of systems.
D. Demonstration and instructions.
E. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F. Project record documents.
G. Operation and maintenance data.
H. Manual for materials and finishes.
I. Manual for equipment and systems.
J. Spare parts and maintenance products.
K. Product warranties and product bonds.
L. Maintenance service.
M. Examination.
N. Preparation.
O. Execution.
P. Cutting and patching.
Q. Protecting installed construction.
R. Final cleaning.
1.2 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancies discovered.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Prior to beginning Work, verify and establish floor elevations of existing facility to ensure work will meet existing elevations in smooth and level alignment except where specifically detailed or indicated otherwise.
C. Confirm drawing dimensions and all elevations.
D. Provide field-engineering services as required to establish elevations, lines, and levels using recognized engineering survey practices.
E. Maintain complete and accurate log of control and survey work as Work progresses.
1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Prerequisites to Substantial Completion: Complete following items before requesting Certification of Substantial Completion, either for entire work or for portions of Work: 1. Submit maintenance manuals, Project record documents, digital images of construction photographs, and other similar final record data in compliance with this Section. 2. Complete facility startup, testing, adjusting, balancing of systems and equipment, demonstrations, and instructions to Owner's operating and maintenance personnel as specified in compliance with this Section. 3. Conduct inspection to establish basis for request that Work is substantially complete. Create comprehensive List (initial Punch List) indicating items to be completed or corrected, value of incomplete or nonconforming Work, reason for being incomplete, and date of anticipated completion for each Item. Include copy of List with request for Certificate of Substantial Completion. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner's full, unrestricted use of Project and access to services and utilities. Include certificate of occupancy, operating certificates, and similar releases from authorities having jurisdiction and utility companies. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of material, and similar physical items to Owner. 6. Make final change-over of locks eliminating construction master-key system and transmit keys directly to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions. 7. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities and services from Project Site, along with construction tools, mockups, and similar elements. 8. Perform final cleaning according to this Section.
B. Substantial Completion Inspection: 1. When Contractor considers Work to be substantially complete, submit to Architect/Engineer: a. Written certificate that Work, or designated portion, is substantially complete. b. List of items to be completed or corrected (initial punch list). 2. Within seven (7) calendar days after receipt of request for Substantial Completion, Architect/Engineer and Owner will make inspection to determine whether Work or designated portion is substantially complete. 3. Should Architect/Engineer or Owner determine that Work is not substantially complete: a. Architect/Engineer or Owner will promptly notify Contractor in writing, stating reasons for that opinion.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
b. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies in Work and send second written request for Substantial Completion to Architect/Engineer and Owner. c. Architect/Engineer and Owner will re-inspect Work. d. Redo and Inspection of Deficient Work: Repeated until Work passes Architect/Engineer's inspection. 4. When Architect/Engineer and Owner finds that Work is substantially complete, Owner will: a. Prepare letter notifying acceptance of work, accompanied by Contractor's List (items to be completed or corrected) as verified and amended by Architect/Engineer and Owner (final Punch List). b. Submit Certificate to Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in Certificate. 5. After Work is substantially complete, Contractor shall: a. Allow Owner occupancy of Project under provisions stated in Certificate of Substantial Completion. b. Complete Work listed for completion or correction within time period stipulated. 6. Owner will occupy all portions of building as specified in Section 01 10 00 - Summary.
C. Prerequisites for Final Completion: Complete following items before requesting final acceptance and final payment. 1. When Contractor considers Work to be complete, submit written certification that: a. Contract Documents have been reviewed. b. Work has been examined for compliance with Contract Documents. c. Work has been completed according to Contract Documents. d. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. 2. Submittals: Submit following: a. Final punch list indicating all items have been completed or corrected. b. Final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. c. Specified warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, and other similar documents. d. Accounting statement for final changes to Contract Sum. e. Contractor's affidavit of payment of debts and claims. f. Contractor affidavit of release of liens. g. Consent of surety to final payment. 3. Perform final cleaning for Contractor-soiled areas according to this Section.
D. Final Completion Inspection: 1. Within seven (7) calendar days after receipt of request for final inspection, Architect/Engineer and Owner will make inspection to determine whether Work or designated portion is complete. 2. Should Architect/Engineer or Owner consider Work to be incomplete or defective: a. Architect/Engineer and/or Owner will promptly notify Contractor in writing, listing incomplete or defective Work. b. Contractor shall remedy stated deficiencies and send second written request to Architect/Engineer and Owner that Work is complete. c. Architect/Engineer and Owner will re-inspect Work.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
d. Redo and Inspection of Deficient Work: Repeated until Work passes Owner's inspection.
1.4 STARTING OF SYSTEMS
A. Coordinate schedule for startup of various equipment and systems.
B. Notify Architect/Engineer and Owner seven (7) calendar days prior to startup of each item.
C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage.
D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer.
E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F. Execute startup under supervision of manufacturer's representative or Contractors' personnel according to manufacturer's instructions.
G. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative who will be present at Site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to startup and will supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
H. Submit a written report according to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.
1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two (2) weeks prior to date of final inspection.
B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months.
C. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
D. Demonstrate startup, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location.
E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
F. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in individual Specification Sections.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.6 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
A. Independent firm will perform services specified in Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and Controls.
B. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Architect/Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or noncompliance with requirements of Contract Documents.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on Site one (1) set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, product data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record, at each product Section, description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates used. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction as follows: 1. Include Contract modifications such as Addenda, supplementary instructions, change directives, field orders, minor changes in the Work, and change orders. 2. Include locations of concealed elements of the Work. 3. Identify depth of buried utility lines and provide dimensions showing distances from permanent facility components that are parallel to utilities. 4. Dimension ends, corners, and junctions of buried utilities to permanent facility components using triangulation. 5. Identify and locate existing buried or concealed items encountered during Project. 6. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 7. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
8. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 9. Field changes of dimension and detail. 10. Details not on original Drawings.
G. Submit marked-up paper copy documents to Architect/Engineer before Substantial Completion, or submit PDF electronic files of marked-up documents to Architect/Engineer before Substantial Completion.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit in PDF format a composite electronic indexed file.
B. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11-inch text page, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers.
C. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS” (O&M), title of Project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.
D. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
E. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
F. Contents: Prepare table of contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system and subdivided by Specification Section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Include the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. g. Safety precautions to be taken when operating and maintaining or working near equipment. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop Drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Originals of warranties.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.9 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit two (2) copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments.
B. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C. Submit one (1) copy of completed volumes before Substantial Completion. Draft copy be reviewed and returned after Substantial Completion, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission.
D. Submit two (2) sets of revised final volumes within ten (10) calendar days after Final Inspection.
E. Submit, in PDF format, composite electronic indexed file of final manual within ten (10) calendar days after Final Inspection.
F. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Include information for re-ordering custom-manufactured products.
G. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
H. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Include recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
I. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product Specification Sections.
J. Include listing in table of contents for design data, with tabbed fly-sheet and space for insertion of data.
1.10 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit two (2) copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one (1) copy with comments.
B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C. Submit one (1) copy of completed volumes before Substantial Completion. Draft copy will be reviewed and returned after Substantial Completion, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. Submit two (2) sets of revised final volumes within ten (10) calendar days after final inspection.
E. Submit in PDF composite electronic indexed file of final manual within ten (10) calendar days after Final Inspection.
F. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
G. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications by label machine.
H. Include color-coded wiring diagrams as installed.
I. Operating Procedures: Include startup, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and special operating instructions.
J. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
K. Include servicing and lubrication schedule and list of lubricants required.
L. Include Manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
M. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
N. Include original Manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.
O. Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.
P. Include Contractor's coordination drawings with color-coded piping diagrams as installed.
Q. Include charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.
R. Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
S. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.
T. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product Specification Sections.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 8 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
U. Include listing in table of contents for design data with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data.
1.11 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual Specification Sections.
B. Deliver to Project Site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
1.12 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers within ten (10) calendar days after completion of applicable item of Work.
B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
C. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
D. Co-execute submittals when required.
E. Include Table of Contents, and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover.
F. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
G. Time of Submittals: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten (10) days after date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Substantial Completion, submit within ten (10) calendar days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty or bond period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 9 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing Site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Verify that utility services are available with correct characteristics and in correct locations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance according to manufacturer's instructions.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply Manufacturer-required or -recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.3 EXECUTION
A. Comply with Manufacturer's Installation Instructions, performing each step in sequence. Maintain one (1) set of Manufacturer's Installation Instructions at Project Site during installation and until completion of construction.
B. When Manufacturer's Installation Instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on approved Shop Drawings, or as instructed by Manufacturer.
D. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1. Secure Work true to line and level and within specified tolerances, or if not specified, industry-recognized tolerances. 2. Physically separate products in place, provide electrical insulation, or provide protective coatings to prevent galvanic action or corrosion between dissimilar metals. 3. Exposed Joints: Provide uniform joint width and arrange to obtain best visual effect. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to Architect/Engineer for final decision.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 10 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
E. Allow for expansion of materials and building movement.
F. Climatic Conditions and Project Status: Install each unit of Work under conditions to ensure best possible results in coordination with entire Project. 1. Isolate each unit of Work from incompatible Work as necessary to prevent deterioration. 2. Coordinate enclosure of Work with required inspections and tests to minimize necessity of uncovering Work for those purposes.
G. Mounting Heights: Where not indicated, mount individual units of Work at industry recognized standard mounting heights for particular application indicated. 1. Refer questionable mounting heights choices to Architect/Engineer for final decision. 2. Elements identified as “Accessible to Handicapped”: Comply with all applicable Codes and Regulations.
H. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
I. Clean and perform maintenance on installed Work as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction period. Lubricate operable components as recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Employ original, skilled and experienced installers to perform cutting and patching.
B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements affecting: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill to complete Work and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and nonconforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work.
D. Execute work employing methods to avoid damage to other Work and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
E. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill.
F. Restore Work with new products according to requirements of Contract Documents.
G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduits, and other penetrations through surfaces.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 11 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids.
I. At penetrations of fire-rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire-rated material according to Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping, to full thickness of penetrated element.
J. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for assembly, refinish entire unit.
K. Identify hazardous substances or conditions exposed during the Work to Architect/Engineer for decision or remedy.
3.5 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate Work area to prevent damage.
C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
D. Use durable sheet materials to protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects.
E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
3.6 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final Project assessment. 1. Employ experienced personnel or professional cleaning firm.
B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains, and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; and vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition with appropriate cleaning materials.
D. Replace filters of operating equipment.
E. Clean debris from roofs and drainage systems.
F. Clean Site; sweep paved areas.
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 12 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from Site.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Execution and Closeout Requirements Cumberland, Rhode Island 01 70 00 - 13 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 01 74 00 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This section is only a portion of the Contract Documents. All Contract Documents, including Conditions of the Contract, and Division I General Requirements, apply to this section. This section applies to all specification sections and Work of the Contract.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Comprehensive Warranty: In addition to specific long-term warranties, which may be required in individual specification sections, provide a comprehensive warranty covering all work, materials, equipment, and labor of the Contract. 1. Warranty Duration: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Consequential Damages and Work: The Comprehensive (Total Contract) Warranty shall include all consequential damages, as well as all work required to uncover, repair, and restore work repaired under Warranty and all related work needed to provide access to the warranted work. Consequential damages include the total cost of repair, replacement, and restitution of property damaged by failure of warranted work. 3. Warranty Claims: The Owner will notify the Contractor in writing of each warranty claim. The Contractor will make repairs within thirty (30) calendar days after receipt of Owner’s claim, unless otherwise pre-approved by the Owner. 4. Expiration of Comprehensive (Total Contract) Warranty: Approximately thirty (30) days prior to expiration of the warranty, the Owner will create a “Warranty Repair List”. Make all repairs within thirty (30) calendar days after receipt of Owner’s list, unless otherwise pre-approved by the Owner. 5. Contractor’s Failure to Perform: If the Contractor fails to remedy work covered by the Comprehensive (Total Contract) Warranty, the Owner may employ other contractors for the work and the General Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the Owner’s total costs.
B. Warranty Starting Date: The date of Substantial Completion of the entire project, Owner defined Project Phase, or the date of Owner’s final acceptance of the work covered by the Warranty if after the date of Substantial Completion.
C. Owner’s Rights: Warranties required under the Contract are in addition to and not in lieu of any remedy or warranty to which the Owner is entitled under law. Warranties required under the Contract are not a waiver of any of the Owner’s rights.
Hart Design Group Warranties and Bonds Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 74 00-1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 74 00 - Warranties and Bonds, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. Contractor’s Obligation: The Owner will notify the Contractor in all instances of warranty claims. At no additional cost to the Owner, the Contractor shall:
1. Notify warrantors and original subcontractors, if any, in writing. 2. Manage the warranty claim for the Owner’s benefit. 3. Assist the Owner in obtaining warranty satisfaction. 4. Arrange and manage all warranty related work including work related to consequential damages.
E. Contractor’s Failure to Perform: The Owner may perform or may hire another entity to perform the Contractor’s obligations. The Owner may recover (its) costs and damages from the Contractor in any Court of competent jurisdiction.
F. Warranty Forms: All warranty forms are subject to the Owner’s pre-approval. Submit warranty form to the Owner and obtain approval prior to procuring work covered by the warranty.
G. Procurement: Do not procure materials, products, equipment, or work requiring warranties until confirmation that required warranties will be provided. Remove and replace materials, products, equipment, and work for which the required warranties are not available.
H. Warranties are Irrevocable: Warranties issued by the Owner are irrevocable. 1. Non-Payment: If warrantor refuses to issue warranty or attempts to revoke warranty due to non-payment by anyone other than the Owner, the Contractor shall correct the deficiency and cause the warranty to be issued or reinstated. 2. Improper Installation: If warrantor refuses to issue warranty or attempts to revoke warranty due to improper installation or other deficiency, the Contractor shall correct the deficiency and cause the warranty to be issued or reinstated.
I. Warranties are Transferable: All warranties shall permit the Owner to transfer or assign warranties to future owners or other assigns.
J. Pro-Rated Warranties: Are not acceptable. Each warranty shall cover the full cost of warranty related repair throughout the full term of the warranty.
K. Warranty Repairs are also covered by Warranty: Work repaired or replaced under warranty shall be warranted for the full duration of the original warranty.
L. Warranty Submission: Furnish originals of each executed warranty to Owner. Submit a three ring bound compilation of all warranties including the comprehensive total Contract warranty and each required long-term warranty. All warranties shall be complete, signed, conformed, and legally binding.
Hart Design Group Warranties and Bonds Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 74 00-2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 74 00 - Warranties and Bonds, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 2
A. NOT USED.
PART 3
A. NOT USED.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Warranties and Bonds Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 01 74 00-3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\01 74 00 - Warranties and Bonds, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Demolishing designated building equipment and fixtures. 2. Demolishing designated construction. 3. Cutting and alterations for completion of the Work. 4. Removing demolished materials.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re-connection.
B. Conform to applicable codes for procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered.
C. Obtain required permits from Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
1.3 SEQUENCING
A. Owner will conduct salvage operations before demolition begins to remove materials Owner chooses to retain.
1.4 SCHEDULING
A. Cooperate with Owner in scheduling noisy operations and waste removal that may affect Owner’s operation.
B. Coordinate utility and building service interruptions with Owner. 1. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without three (3) days prior written notice to Owner. 2. Schedule tie-ins to existing systems to minimize disruption. 3. Coordinate Work to ensure fire sprinklers, fire alarms, smoke detectors, emergency lighting, exit signs and other life safety systems remain in full operation in occupied areas.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.
B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.
Hart Design Group Selective Demolition Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 02 41 19 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\02 41 19 - Selective Demolition, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. NOT USED.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.
B. Mark location and termination of utilities.
C. Erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices, including warning signs and lights, and similar measures for protection of the public and Owner.
D. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued Owner occupancy.
E. Prevent movement of structure; provide temporary bracing and shoring required to ensure safety of existing structure.
F. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress.
G. Do not close or obstruct building egress path.
H. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without three (3) days prior written notice to Owner.
3.2 DEMOLITION
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.
B. Maintain protected egress from and access to existing building at all times.
C. Cease operations immediately when structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect / Engineer.
D. Disconnect and remove designated utilities within demolition areas.
E. Cap and identify abandoned utilities at termination points when utility is not completely removed. Annotate Record Drawings indicating location and type of service for capped utilities remaining after demolition.
F. Demolish in orderly and careful manner. Protect existing improvements, and supporting structural members.
Hart Design Group Selective Demolition Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 02 41 19 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\02 41 19 - Selective Demolition, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
G. Remove demolished materials from site except where noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site.
H. Remove materials as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in clean condition.
I. Remove all Temporary Work.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Selective Demolition Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 02 41 19 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\02 41 19 - Selective Demolition, Rev 0.doc
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast-in place concrete. 2. Shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 3. Form accessories. 4. Form stripping.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Product requirements for masonry accessories for placement by this Section. 4. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Product requirements for metal fabrications for placement by this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Note: All referenced codes to be latest version unless noted otherwise.
B. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 4. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
C. American Forest and Paper Association: 1. AF&PA - National Design Specifications for Wood Construction.
D. The Engineered Wood Association: 1. APA/EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.
E. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 2. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
Hart Design Group Concrete Forming and Accessories Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 10 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing in accordance with ACI 318 to conform to design and applicable code requirements to achieve concrete shape, line and dimension as indicated on Drawings.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Vapor Retarder Permeance: Class II Vapor retarder, maximum 1 perm when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, water method.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit formwork, shoring, and reshoring shop drawings. 2. Indicate the following: a. Pertinent dimensions, openings, methods of construction, types of connections, materials, joint arrangement and details, ties and shores, location of framing, studding and bracing, and temporary supports. b. Means of leakage prevention for concrete exposed to view in finished construction. c. Sequence and timing of erection and stripping, assumed compressive strength at time of stripping, height of lift, and height of drop during placement. d. Vertical, horizontal, and special loads according to ACI 347, and camber diagrams when applicable. e. Notes to formwork erector showing size and location of conduits and piping embedded in concrete in accordance with ACI 318, Section 6.3. f. Procedure and schedule for removal of shores and installation and removal of reshores.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347 and ACI 318.
B. For wood products furnished for work of this Section, comply with AF&PA.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Coordinate this Section with other sections of work, requiring attachment of components to formwork.
Hart Design Group Concrete Forming and Accessories Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 10 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: At discretion of Contractor.
B. Lumber Forms: 1. Application: Use for edge forms and unexposed finish concrete. 2. Boards: 6 inches or 8 inches in width, shiplapped or tongue and groove, “Standard” Grade Douglas Fir, conforming to WCLIB Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. Surface boards on four sides.
C. Plywood Forms: 1. Application: Use for exposed finish concrete. 2. Forms: Conform to PS 1; full size 4 x 8 feet panels; each panel labeled with grade trademark of APA/EWA. 3. Plywood for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Minimum of 5/8 inch thick; APA/EWA “B-B Plyform Structural I Exterior” grade. 4. Plywood where “Smooth Finish” is required, as indicated on Drawings: APA/EWA “HD Overlay Plyform Structural I Exterior” grade, minimum of 3/4 inch thick.
2.2 PREFABRICATED FORMS
A. Manufacturers: 1. EFCO – Economy Forms Corp. 2. Symons by Dayton Superior. 3. Wall Ties & Forms, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.
C. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces.
D. Pan Type: Steel of size and profile required.
E. Steel Forms: Sheet steel, suitably reinforced, and designed for particular use indicated on Drawings.
F. Form Liners: Smooth, durable, grainless and non-staining hardboard, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
G. Framing, Studding and Bracing: Stud or No. 3 structural light framing grade.
Hart Design Group Concrete Forming and Accessories Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 10 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Snap-off type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, free of defects capable of leaving holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface. 1. Manufacturers: a. Heckmann Building Products. b. Symons by Dayton Superior. c. Wall Ties & Forms, Inc. d. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Spreaders: Standard, non-corrosive metal form clamp assembly, of type acting as spreaders and leaving no metal within 1 inch of concrete face. Wire ties, wood spreaders or through bolts are not permitted.
C. Form Anchors and Hangers: 1. Do not use anchors and hangers on exposed concrete leaving exposed metal at concrete surface. 2. Symmetrically arrange hangers supporting forms from structural steel members to minimize twisting or rotation of member. 3. Penetration of structural steel members is not permitted.
D. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture. 1. Manufacturers: a. Architectural Concrete Chemicals, Inc. b. Nox-Crete Products Group c. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
E. Corners: Chamfer, wood strip type; 3/4 x 3/4 inch size unless otherwise indicated; lengths to be maximum possible.
F. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dur-O-Wall, a division of Dayton Superior. b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. c. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
G. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. 1. Manufacturers: a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
H. Vapor Retarder: Where indicated on Drawings, 8 mil thick polyethylene sheet.
Hart Design Group Concrete Forming and Accessories Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 10 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
I. Bituminous Joint Filler: ASTM D1751.
J. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Size, strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
K. Water Stops: Rubber or Polyvinyl chloride, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F working temperature range, minimum 6 inch wide, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing. 1. Manufacturers: a. BoMetals, Inc. b. Sika USA. c. JP Specialties, Inc. d. WESTEC Barrier Technologies, Inc. e. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Verify dimensions agree with Drawings.
C. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Earth Forms: 1. Earth forms are not permitted.
B. Formwork - General: 1. Provide top form for sloped surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical to hold shape of concrete during placement, unless it can be demonstrated that top forms can be omitted. 2. Construct forms to correct shape and dimensions, mortar-tight, braced, and of sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. 3. Camber forms where necessary to produce level finished soffits unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 4. Carefully verify horizontal and vertical positions of forms. Correct misaligned or misplaced forms before placing concrete. 5. Complete wedging and bracing before placing concrete.
C. Forms for Smooth Finish Concrete: 1. Use steel, plywood or lined board forms. 2. Use clean and smooth plywood and form liners, uniform in size, and free from surface and edge damage capable of affecting resulting concrete finish.
Hart Design Group Concrete Forming and Accessories Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 10 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3. Install form lining with close-fitting square joints between separate sheets without springing into place. 4. Use full size sheets of form lines and plywood wherever possible. 5. Tape joints to prevent protrusions in concrete. 6. Use care in forming and stripping wood forms to protect corners and edges. 7. Level and continue horizontal joints. 8. Keep wood forms wet until stripped.
D. Forms for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Use plywood or steel forms. After erection of forms, tape form joints to prevent protrusions in concrete.
E. Framing, Studding and Bracing: 1. Space studs at 16 inches on center maximum for boards and 12 inches on center maximum for plywood. 2. Size framing, bracing, centering, and supporting members with sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. 3. Construct beam soffits of material minimum of 2 inches thick. 4. Distribute bracing loads over base area on which bracing is erected. 5. When placed on ground, protect against undermining, settlement or accidental impact.
F. Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 318.
G. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
H. Obtain Architect/Engineer’s approval before framing openings in structural members not indicated on Drawings.
I. Install chamfer strips on exposed external corners of columns, piers and wall edges.
J. Do not reuse wood formwork more than three times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork.
3.3 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are indicated to receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
D. Reuse and Coating of Forms: Thoroughly clean forms and reapply form coating before each reuse. For exposed work, do not reuse forms with damaged faces or edges. Apply form coating to forms in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Do not coat forms for concrete indicated to receive “scored finish”. Apply form coatings before placing reinforcing steel.
Hart Design Group Concrete Forming and Accessories Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 10 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.4 INSTALLATION - INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Install formed openings for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work.
B. Locate and set in place items required to be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with Work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work.
D. Position recessed reglets for brick veneer masonry anchors in accordance with spacing and intervals specified in Section 04 20 00.
E. Install accessories straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
F. Install water stops continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints watertight.
G. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
H. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
I. Form Ties: 1. Use sufficient strength and sufficient quantity to prevent spreading of forms. 2. Place ties at least 1 inch away from finished surface of concrete. 3. Leave inner rods in concrete when forms are stripped. 4. Space form ties equidistant, symmetrical and aligned vertically and horizontally unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
J. Arrangement: Arrange formwork to allow proper erection sequence and to permit form removal without damage to concrete.
K. Construction Joints: 1. Install surfaced pouring strip where construction joints intersect exposed surfaces to provide straight line at joints. 2. Just prior to subsequent concrete placement, remove strip and tighten forms to conceal shrinkage. 3. Show no overlapping of construction joints. Construct joints to present same appearance as butted plywood joints. 4. Arrange joints in continuous line straight, true and sharp.
L. Embedded Items: 1. Make provisions for pipes, sleeves, anchors, inserts, reglets, anchor slots, nailers, water stops, and other features. 2. Do not embed wood or uncoated aluminum in concrete. 3. Obtain installation and setting information for embedded items furnished under other Specification sections.
Hart Design Group Concrete Forming and Accessories Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 10 00 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
4. Securely anchor embedded items in correct location and alignment prior to placing concrete. 5. Verify conduits and pipes, including those made of coated aluminum, meet requirements of ACI 318 for size and location limitations.
M. Openings for Items Passing Through Concrete: 1. Frame openings in concrete where indicated on Drawings. Establish exact locations, sizes, and other conditions required for openings and attachment of work specified under other sections. 2. Coordinate work to avoid cutting and patching of concrete after placement. 3. Perform cutting and repairing of concrete required as result of failure to provide required openings.
N. Screeds: 1. Set screeds and establish levels for tops of concrete slabs and levels for finish on slabs. 2. Slope slabs to drain where required or as shown on Drawings. 3. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete and thoroughly wet forms. Remove freestanding water.
O. Screed Supports: 1. For concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor retarder membranes, use cradle, pad or base type screed supports which will not puncture membrane. 2. Staking through membrane is not be permitted.
P. Cleanouts and Access Panels: 1. Provide removable cleanout sections or access panels at bottoms of forms to permit inspection and effective cleaning of loose dirt, debris and waste material. 2. Clean forms and surfaces against which concrete is to be placed. Remove chips, saw dust and other debris. Thoroughly blow out forms with compressed air just before concrete is placed.
3.5 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.6 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads and removal has been approved by Architect/Engineer.
Hart Design Group Concrete Forming and Accessories Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 10 00 - 8 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms.
D. Leave forms in place for minimum number of days as specified in ACI 347.
3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 318.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
C. Notify Architect/Engineer after placement of reinforcing steel in forms, but prior to placing concrete.
D. Schedule concrete placement to permit formwork inspection before placing concrete.
3.9 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Concrete Forming and Accessories Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 10 00 - 9 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bars. 2. Welded wire fabric. 3. Reinforcement accessories.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing: Reinforcement for concrete floor toppings. 4. Section 03 41 00 - Precast Structural Concrete: Reinforcement for precast structural concrete. 5. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Grounding concrete reinforcement. 6. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for masonry.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Note: All referenced codes to be latest version unless noted otherwise.
B. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. 4. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual.
C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM A704/A704M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
Hart Design Group Concrete Reinforcing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 20 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
6. A1064/A1064M-18a Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plan and Deformed, for Concrete.
D. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
E. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: 1. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. 2. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, material specifications, and quantities of reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices.
C. Certificates: Submit AWS qualification certificate for welders employed on the Work.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice and ACI 318.
B. Prepare shop drawings in accordance with ACI SP-66.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Welders: AWS qualified within previous 12 months.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish.
Hart Design Group Concrete Reinforcing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 20 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Deformed Bar Mats: ASTM A184/A184M; fabricated from ASTM A615/A615M; 60 ksi yield strength, steel bars, unfinished.
C. Welded Plain Wire Fabric: ASTM A185/A185M; in flat sheets; unfinished.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type.
B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor retarder puncture.
C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Plastic-coated steel type; size and shape to meet Project conditions.
D. Reinforcing Splicing Devices: Mechanical set screw or threaded type; full tension and compression; sized to fit joined reinforcing. 1. Manufacturers: a. ERICO International Corporation. b. Symons by Dayton Superior c. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcement in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice and ACI 318.
B. Form standard hooks for 90 degree bend and stirrup and tie hooks per ACI 318 unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
C. Form reinforcement bends with minimum diameters in accordance with ACI 318.
D. Fabricate column reinforcement with offset bends at reinforcement splices.
E. Form spiral column reinforcement from minimum 3/8 inch diameter continuous deformed bar or wire.
F. Form ties and stirrups from the following: 1. For bars No. 10 and Smaller: No. 3 deformed bars. 2. For bars No. 11 and Larger: No. 4 deformed bars.
G. Weld reinforcement not permitted.
H. If not indicated on Drawings, locate reinforcement splices at point of minimum stress.
Hart Design Group Concrete Reinforcing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 20 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.
B. Make completed reinforcement available for inspection at manufacturer’s factory prior to packaging for shipment. Notify Architect/Engineer at least seven days before inspection is allowed.
C. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position beyond specified tolerance. 1. Do not weld crossing reinforcement bars for assembly.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder.
C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D. Space reinforcement bars with minimum clear spacing in accordance with ACI 318. 1. Where bars are indicated in multiple layers, place upper bars directly above lower bars.
E. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 as follows:
Reinforcement Location Minimum Concrete Cover Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth 3 inches Concrete exposed to No. 6 bars and larger 2 inches earth or weather No. 5 bars and smaller 1-1/2 inches Supported Slabs, No. 14 bars and larger 1-1/2 inches Walls, and Joists No. 11 bars and smaller 3/4 inches Beams and Columns 1-1/2 inches Shell and Folded No. 6 bars and larger 3/4 inches Plate Members No. 5 bars and smaller 1/2 inches
F. Splice reinforcing if required in accordance with splicing device manufacturer’s instructions.
Hart Design Group Concrete Reinforcing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 20 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
G. Bond and ground reinforcement in accordance with requirements of Section 26 05 26.
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Install reinforcement within the following tolerances for flexural members, walls, and compression members:
Reinforcement Depth Depth Tolerance Concrete Cover Tolerance Greater than 8 inches plus or minus 3/8 inch minus 3/8 inch Less than 8 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch minus 1/2 inch
C. Install reinforcement within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 for foundation walls.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements and 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with applicable code.
C. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.
D. Reinforcement Inspection: 1. Placement Acceptance: Specified and ACI 318 material requirements and specified placement tolerances. 2. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3. Periodic Placement Inspection: Inspect for correct materials, fabrication, sizes, locations, spacing, concrete cover, and splicing.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Concrete Reinforcing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 20 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete for the following: 1. Foundation walls. 2. Supported slabs. 3. Slabs on grade. 4. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices. 5. Equipment pads. 6. Site retaining wall. 7. Manholes.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 3. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing. 4. Section 03 39 00 - Concrete Curing. 5. Section 07 95 00 - Expansion Control. 6. Section 31 23 23 – Fill.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Note: All referenced codes to be latest version unless noted otherwise.
B. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 305 – Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 5. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 5. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 6. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 7. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
Hart Design Group Cast-In-Place Concrete Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 30 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
8. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 9. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 10. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 11. ASTM C330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. 12. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 13. ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 14. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. 15. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made By Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing. 16. ASTM C845 - Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement. 17. ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Slag Concrete for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 18. ASTM C1017/C1017M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 19. ASTM C1064/C1064M - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. 20. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 21. ASTM C1218/C1218M - Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 22. ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). 23. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 24. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber, Cork, and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 25. ASTM D6690 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. 26. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 27. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 28. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 29. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Vapor Retarder Permeance: Maximum 1 perm when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, water method.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on joint devices, attachment accessories and admixtures.
C. Design Data: Hart Design Group Cast-In-Place Concrete Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 30 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength. Submit separate mix designs when admixtures are required for the following: a. Hot and cold weather concrete work. b. Air entrained concrete work. 2. Identify mix ingredients and proportions, including admixtures. 3. Identify chloride content of admixtures and whether or not chloride was added during manufacture.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components concealed from view in finished construction.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather.
C. Conform to ACI 306.1 when concreting during cold weather.
D. Acquire cement and aggregate from one source for Work.
E. Fire Rated Floor Construction: Rating as indicated on Drawings. 1. Tested Rating: Determined in accordance with ASTM E119.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Maintain concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degrees F for minimum 7 days.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.
Hart Design Group Cast-In-Place Concrete Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 30 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal or Type IA - Air Entraining Portland type.
B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33. 1. Coarse Aggregate Maximum Size: In accordance with ACI 318.
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330. 1. Coarse Aggregate Maximum Size: In accordance with ACI 318.
D. Water: ACI 318; potable, without deleterious amounts of chloride ions.
2.2 ADMIXTURES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Euclid Chemical Company. 2. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. 3. Sika Corporation. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.
C. Chemical: ASTM C494/C494M. 1. Type A - Water Reducing. 2. Type B - Retarding. 3. Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding. 4. Type F - Water Reducing, High Range. 5. Type G - Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding.
D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618 Class.
E. Slag: ASTM C989; Grade 80; ground granulated blast furnace slag.
F. Plasticizing: ASTM C1017/C1017M Type II, plasticizing and retarding.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sika Corporation (Model Sikadur 32). b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745 Class A; 6 mil thick fabric reinforced plastic film; type recommended for below grade application. Furnish joint tape recommended by manufacturer.
Hart Design Group Cast-In-Place Concrete Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 30 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days.
2.4 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS
A. Joint Filler Type A: ASTM D1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/4 inch thick; tongue and groove profile.
B. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel; formed to tongue and groove profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes spaced at 6 inches, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge.
C. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07 90 00.
2.5 CONCRETE MIX
A. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1.
B. Provide concrete to the following criteria:
Material and Property Measurement Compressive Strength (7 day) 2,500 psi Compressive Strength (28 day) 4,000 psi Cement Type ASTM C150 Cement Content (minimum) 564 pounds/cu yd Aggregate Type Normal weight Water-Cement Ratio (maximum) 0.40 by weight Aggregate Size (maximum) 3/4 inch Aggregate Size (minimum) 3/8 inch Air Content 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent Fly Ash Content: 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight, maximum Slump 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch
C. Admixtures: Include admixture types and quantities indicated in concrete mix designs only when approved by Architect/Engineer. 1. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. 2. Do not use calcium chloride nor admixtures containing calcium chloride. 3. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather.
Hart Design Group Cast-In-Place Concrete Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 30 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
4. Add air entrainment admixture to concrete mix for work exposed to freezing and thawing or deicing chemicals. 5. For concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, limit fly ash, pozzolans, silica fume, and slag content as required by applicable code.
D. Average Compressive Strength Reduction: Permitted in accordance with ACI 318.
E. Ready Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
F. Site Mixed Concrete: Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 318.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
C. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with placing concrete.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Remove laitance, coatings, and unsound materials.
B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
C. Remove debris and ice from formwork, reinforcement, and concrete substrates.
D. Remove water from areas receiving concrete before concrete is placed.
3.3 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Notify testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations.
C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed expansion and contraction joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.
D. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade in accordance with ASTM E1643. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends.
Hart Design Group Cast-In-Place Concrete Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 30 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
E. Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
F. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07 90 00.
G. Deposit concrete at final position. Prevent segregation of mix.
H. Place concrete in continuous operation for each panel or section determined by predetermined joints.
I. Consolidate concrete.
J. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.
K. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
L. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
M. Place floor slabs in checkerboard or saw cut pattern indicated.
N. Saw cut joints within 12 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness.
O. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed (concrete walls) with smooth rubbed finish.
B. Finish concrete floor surfaces to requirements of Section 03 35 00.
3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. 1. Protect concrete footings from freezing for minimum 5 days.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Cure concrete floor surfaces as specified in Section 03 39 00.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with ACI 318 and applicable building code.
Hart Design Group Cast-In-Place Concrete Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 30 00 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.
D. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work.
E. Concrete Inspections: 1. Continuous Placement Inspection: Inspect for proper installation procedures. 2. Periodic Curing Inspection: Inspect for specified curing temperature and procedures.
F. Strength Test Samples: 1. Sampling Procedures: ASTM C172. 2. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: ASTM C31/C31M, cylinder specimens, field cured. 3. Sample concrete and make one set of four (4) cylinders for every 75 cu yds or less of each class of concrete placed each day and for every 5,000 sf of surface area for slabs and walls. 4. When volume of concrete for any class of concrete would provide less than 5 sets of cylinders, take samples from five randomly selected batches, or from every batch when less than 5 batches are used. 5. During cold weather concreting, make one additional cylinder and field cure.
G. Field Testing: 1. Slump Test Method: ASTM C143/C143M. 2. Air Content Test Method: ASTM C173/C173M. 3. Temperature Test Method: ASTM C1064/C1064M. 4. Measure slump and temperature for each compressive strength concrete sample. 5. Measure air content in air entrained concrete for each compressive strength concrete sample.
H. Cylinder Compressive Strength Testing: 1. Test Method: ASTM C39/C39M. 2. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318. 3. Test one cylinder at 7 days. 4. Test two cylinders at 28 days. 5. Retain one cylinder for testing when requested by Architect/Engineer. 6. Dispose remaining cylinders when testing is not required.
I. Core Compressive Strength Testing: 1. Sampling and Testing Procedures: ASTM C42/C42M. 2. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318. 3. Drill three cores for each failed strength test from concrete represented by failed strength test.
J. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken.
3.7 PATCHING
A. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.
Hart Design Group Cast-In-Place Concrete Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 30 00 - 8 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery.
C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.
B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Architect/Engineer.
C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area.
3.9 SCHEDULE - CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHES
A. Footings and Foundation Systems: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, form finish with honeycomb filled surface.
B. Ground Floor Slab-on-Grade: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, wood float finish, wet cured without sealers and hardeners.
C. Elevated Floor Slab on Deck: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, steel trowel finish with sealer.
D. Exterior Concrete Walks and Pads: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, air-entrained, broom finish.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Cast-In-Place Concrete Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 30 00 - 9 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 03 35 00
CONCRETE FINISHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Finishing concrete floors. 2. Floor surface treatment.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Prepared concrete floors ready to receive finish;. 2. Section 03 39 00 - Concrete Curing. 3. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection. 4. Section 07 95 00 - Expansion Control.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Note: All referenced codes to be latest version unless noted otherwise.
B. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 302.1 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and of Levelness Using the F-number System.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on sealer, curing papers and slip resistant treatment, compatibilities, and limitations.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1.
Hart Design Group Concrete Finishing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 35 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Temporary Lighting: Minimum 200 W light source, placed 8 feet above floor surface, for each 425 sq ft of floor being finished.
C. Temporary Heat: Ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum.
D. Ventilation: Sufficient to prevent injurious gases from temporary heat or other sources affecting concrete.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Coordinate the Work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPOUNDS - SEALERS
A. Sealer: Acrylic type. 1. Manufacturers: a. Euclid Chemical. b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
Hart Design Group Concrete Finishing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 35 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Verify floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the Work of this section.
3.2 FLOOR FINISHING
A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1.
B. Wood float surfaces receiving cementitious and epoxy finishes with full bed setting system.
C. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed.
D. In areas with floor drains, maintain design floor elevation at walls; slope surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on Drawings.
3.3 FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT
A. Apply sealer as scheduled on floor surfaces.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness For Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
C. Correct defects in defined traffic floor by grinding or removal and replacement of defective Work. Areas requiring corrective Work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by same process.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Infill Slabs: Sealer, clear mineral type, surface flatness tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
B. Mezzanine Floor: Sealer, clear mineral type, surface flatness tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Concrete Finishing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 35 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 03 39 00
CONCRETE CURING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Note: All referenced codes to be latest version unless noted otherwise.
B. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 302.1 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 3. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 4. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 2. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 3. ASTM C1315 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. 4. ASTM D2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on mats, paper, film, compatibilities, and limitations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 318.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
Hart Design Group Concrete Curing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 39 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 39 00 - Concrete Curing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Mats Type C: ASTM C171, burlap-polyethylene, minimum 9 oz/sq yd bonded to prevent separation during handling and placing. 1. Manufacturers: a. Reef Industries, Inc. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Polyethylene Film Type E: ASTM D2103, 6 mil thick, white opaque color.
C. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete, without deleterious amounts of chloride ions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are ready to be cured.
3.2 INSTALLATION - HORIZONTAL SURFACES
A. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308.1.
B. Polyethylene Film: Spread over floor slab areas, lap edges and sides, seal with pressure sensitive tape; maintain in place for 7 days.
3.3 INSTALLATION - VERTICAL SURFACES
A. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308.1.
B. Spraying: Spray water over surfaces and maintain wet for 7 days.
3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished Work.
B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Concrete Curing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 39 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 39 00 - Concrete Curing Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 03 60 00
GROUTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Portland cement grout. 2. Non-shrink cementitious grout.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Note: All referenced codes to be latest version unless noted otherwise.
B. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 350 – Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. 4. ACI 350.1 – Specification for Tightness Testing of Environmental Engineering Concrete Containment Structures.
C. American Society of Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM C40 - Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. 3. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 4. ASTM C191 - Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle. 5. ASTM C307 - Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. 6. ASTM C531 - Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 7. ASTM C579 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes. 8. ASTM C827 - Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures.
D. U. S. Army Corps of Engineers Concrete Research Division (CRD): 1. CRD C621 - Non-Shrink Grout.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
Hart Design Group Grouting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 60 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 60 00 - Grouting Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Product Data: Submit product data on grout.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s instructions for mixing, handling, surface preparation and placing epoxy type and non-shrink type grouts.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530/530.1.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Deliver grout in manufacturer's unopened containers with proper labels intact.
C. Store grout in a dry shelter, protect from moisture.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Do not perform grouting if temperatures exceed 85 degrees F.
C. Maintain minimum temperature of 40 degrees F before, during, and after grouting, until grout has set.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I and II.
B. Water: 1. Potable; containing no impurities, suspended particles, algae or dissolved natural salts in quantities capable of causing: a. Corrosion of steel. b. Volume change increasing shrinkage cracking. c. Efflorescence. d. Excess air entraining.
C. Fine Aggregate: 1. Washed natural sand. 2. Gradation in accordance with ASTM C33 and represented by smooth granulometric curve within required limits.
Hart Design Group Grouting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 60 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 60 00 - Grouting Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3. Free from injurious amounts of organic impurities as determined by ASTM C40.
D. Mix: 1. Portland cement, sand and water. Do not use ferrous aggregate or staining ingredients in grout mixes.
2.2 NON-SHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Euclid Chemical Company. 2. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Non-shrink Cementitious Grout: Pre-mixed ready for use formulation requiring only addition of water; non-shrink, non-corrosive, non-metallic, non-gas forming, no chlorides.
C. Properties: Certified to maintain initial placement volume or expand after set and meet the following minimum properties when tested in accordance with CRD-C621, for Type D non- shrink grout:
Property Test Time Result Setting Time ASTM C191 Initial 2 hours (Approx) Final 3 hours (Approx) Expansion 0.10% - 0.4% Maximum Compressive Strength CRD-C621 1 day 4,000 psi 7 days 7,000 psi 28 days 10,000 psi to 10,800 psi
2.3 FORMWORK
A. Refer to Section 03 10 00 for formwork requirements.
2.4 CURING
A. Prevent rapid loss of water from grout during first 48 hours by use of approved membrane curing compound or with use of wet burlap method.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify areas to receive grout.
Hart Design Group Grouting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 60 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 60 00 - Grouting Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces by brushing, hammering, chipping or other similar means until sound, clean concrete surface is achieved.
B. Rough concrete lightly, but not enough to interfere with placement of grout.
C. Remove foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout.
D. Align, level and maintain final positioning of components to be grouted.
E. Saturate concrete surfaces with clean water; remove excess water, leave none standing.
3.3 INSTALLATION - FORMWORK
A. Construct leakproof forms anchored and shored to withstand grout pressures.
B. Install formwork with clearances to permit proper placement of grout.
3.4 MIXING
A. Portland Cement Grout: 1. Use proportions of 2 parts sand and 1 part cement, measured by volume. 2. Prepare grout with water to obtain consistency to permit placing and packing. 3. Mix water and grout in two steps; pre-mix using approximately 2/3 of water; after partial mixing, add remaining water to bring mix to desired placement consistency and continue mixing 2 to 3 minutes. 4. Mix only quantities of grout capable of being placed within 30 minutes after mixing. 5. Do not add additional water after grout has been mixed. 6. Capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in 48 hours and 7000 psi in 28 days.
B. Mix and prepare non-shrink cementitious grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in 48 hours and 7000 psi in 28 days.
C. Mix grout components in proximity to work area and transport mixture quickly and in manner not permitting segregation of materials.
3.5 PLACING GROUT
A. Place grout material quickly and continuously.
B. Do not use pneumatic-pressure or dry-packing methods.
C. Apply grout from one side only to avoid entrapping air.
Hart Design Group Grouting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 60 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 60 00 - Grouting Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. Do not vibrate placed grout mixture, or permit placement when area is being vibrated by nearby equipment.
E. Thoroughly compact final installation and eliminate air pockets.
F. Do not remove leveling shims for at least 48 hours after grout has been placed.
3.6 CURING
A. Immediately after placement, protect grout from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. After grout has attained its initial set, keep damp for minimum of 3 days.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Field testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 318 and under provisions of Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of grout to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work.
D. Tests of grout components may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Grouting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 03 60 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\03 60 00 - Grouting Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021A
SECTION 05 05 19
POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS AND REINFORCING BARS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Post-installed adhesive and expansion anchors for concrete and concrete masonry unit substrates 2. Post-installed reinforcing bar dowels using adhesive anchoring system.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete: Supply of anchors for casting into concrete. 2. Section 03 41 13 – Precast Concrete Planks: Placement of precast concrete anchorage devices to structural steel. 3. Section 03 60 00 – Grouting: Grout for setting base plates.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to post-installed anchors including, but not limited to, the following: a. Verify specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Materials, material application, sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances. c. Temperature, humidity & moisture limitations for adhesive anchoring system. d. Manufacturer’s instructions for installation of expansion anchors and adhesive anchoring system. e. Quality-control program. f. Coordination with building occupants. 2. Attendees: a. Owner. b. Resident Engineer. c. Contractor d. Engineer. e. Manufacturer Representative.
Hart Design Group Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 05 19 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 05 19 - Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021A
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Post-Installed Expansion Anchors: 1. Design Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and data including recommended design values and physical characteristics for expansion anchors. 2. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, materials and finishes for post-installed expansion anchors installed into cracked concrete and masonry. 3. Installation Procedures: Submit procedures stating product proposed for use and complete installation method.
C. Post-Installed Adhesive Anchoring System: 1. Design Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and data including recommended design values and physical characteristics. Physical characteristics include temperature, humidity, and moisture limitations for adhesive anchoring system. 2. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, materials and finishes for any post-installed adhesive anchoring systems installed into cracked concrete and masonry. 3. Installation Procedures: Submit procedures stating method of drilling, product proposed for use, and complete installation method.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Installation procedure: Submit installation procedure for post-installed adhesive anchoring system, including method of drilling.
B. Qualification Data: 1. Installer: Indicate manufacturer’s training date and a list of personnel trained on installation of adhesive anchoring system.
C. Evaluation Reports: From ICC-ES for expansion anchors and adhesive anchoring system, reports shall be for installation of post-installed anchors into cracked concrete or concrete masonry unit, as applicable, indicating conformance with current ICC ES Acceptance Criteria.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Coordinate with the work of other Sections, field verifying dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work before installing items specified in this Section.
Hart Design Group Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 05 19 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 05 19 - Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021A
B. Adhesive Anchoring System: 1. Installer Training: Conduct thorough training by the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative. Training shall consist of the complete installation process for post- installed anchors and reinforcing bar dowels, including but not limited to: a. Tool selection. b. Hole drilling procedure. c. Hole preparation and cleaning techniques. d. Adhesive injection technique and dispenser training and maintenance. e. Anchor preparation and installation. e. Reinforcing bar dowels preparation and installation. f. Proof loading and torqueing. g. Temperature, humidity, and moisture limitations. h. Working time limitations. i. Setting time. 2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation: Submit upon completion of work, for the post-installed anchors and reinforcing bar dowels.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver items to be incorporated into the work of other trades in sufficient time to be checked prior to installation.
B. Handle materials with cranes or derricks. Do not dump material off transportation vehicles or handle in ways that will cause damage.
C. Store materials elevated above grade and block up so they will not become bent or otherwise damaged.
D. Repair items that have become damaged or corroded to satisfaction of the Engineer prior to incorporating them into the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EXPANSION ANCHORS
A. Fastening to Concrete Substrate: Zinc plated carbon steel wedge type anchors, complete with zinc plated nuts and washers, unless otherwise noted.
B. Submerged or Weather Exposed Substrates: ASTM A276 Type 316 stainless steel wedge type anchors, complete with Type 316 stainless steel nuts and washers, unless otherwise noted.
C. Meet ICC ES AC01 or ICC ES AC193.
D. Length: When length or anchor embedment is not indicated, provide length sufficient to place the wedge and expansion cone portion of the anchor at least 1 inch behind concrete reinforcing steel.
Hart Design Group Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 05 19 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 05 19 - Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021A
E. Basis-of-Design: 1. Anchorage designs indicated are based on Hilti, Kwik-Bolt TZ, unless otherwise noted. 2. Acceptable Anchors: Hilti Kwik-Bolt TZ; Simpson Strong-Tie Strong Bolt 2 Wedge Anchor; DeWalt Power-Stud+ SD1; DeWalt Power-Stud+ SD6 for stainless steel; or equal.
2.2 ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEM
A. Fastening to Concrete Substrate: Manufactured system consisting of post installed threaded rods, nuts, washers, other anchoring hardware, and chemical dispenser for installation in hammer drilled holes. 1. Anchors: Meet ICC ES AC308. 2. Injection Adhesive: Two-component epoxy system consisting of a hardener and a resin, furnished in pre-measured side-by-side cartridges which keep both components separate. a. Adhesive: Made for use in contact with potable water. 3. Adhesive Cartridge: Side-by-side design to accept a static mixing nozzle which thoroughly blends both components and allows injection directly into a drilled hole. 4. Anchor: Type 316 stainless steel as indicated consisting of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer, of matching material to anchor rod. a. Basis-of-Design: 1) Anchorage designs indicated are based on Hilti HIT- RE 500 V3, unless otherwise noted. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti HIT-RE 500 V3; Simpson Strong Tie SET- XP; ITW Ramset Red Head Epcon G5; or equal.
5. Reinforcing Bar Dowels: Reinforcing bar, per Section 032000. a. Basis-of-Design: 1) Anchorage designs indicated are based on Hilti HIT- RE 500 V3, unless otherwise noted. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti HIT-RE 500 V3; Simpson Strong Tie SET- XP; ITW Ramset Red Head Epcon G5; or equal.
B. Fastening to Hollow Concrete Block, or Hollow-Core Precast Concrete Planks: Three-part threaded rod, screen tube, and chemical dispenser anchoring system. 1. Anchors: Meet ICC ES AC58. 2. Adhesive Cartridges: Contain pre-measured amounts of resin and hardener which are mixed and deposited in a screen tube by a dispenser. 3. Anchor: Type 316 stainless steel as indicated consisting of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer; material to match anchor rod. 4. Reinforcing Bar Dowel: Reinforcing bar, per Section 032000. 5. Basis-of-Design: a. Anchorage designs indicated are based on Hilti HIT HY-70 System, unless otherwise noted; or equal.
Hart Design Group Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 05 19 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 05 19 - Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021A
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: 1. Install anchoring system in strict compliance with manufacturer's published installation instructions and approved Shop Drawings. Comply with recommended surface preparation, temperature, and moisture of substrate and ambient conditions. 2. Coordinate installation with Special Inspector. 3. Use drill bit of correct diameter and drill to required depth using rotary impact type hammer drills with carbide-tipped bits. 4. Drill holes perpendicular to concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Use oil free compressed air to blast out loose particles and dust from drilled holes.
B. Expansion anchors: 1. Check expansion anchors for tightness a minimum of 24 hours after initial installation.
C. Adhesive anchoring system: 1. Perform installation only by personnel trained in anchor installation and having certification required in PART 1 - GENERAL. 2. Inject adhesive and install anchors and reinforcing bar dowels that are clean and free of dirt, oil, grease, ice or other deleterious material which would reduce bond.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 05 19 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 05 19 - Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Structural shapes. 2. Channels and angles. 3. Hollow structural sections. 4. Structural pipe. 5. Structural plates. 6. Floor plates. 7. Bolts, connectors, and anchors. 8. Grout.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 00 – Cast In Place Concrete: Supply of anchors for casting into concrete. 2. Section 03 41 13 – Precast Concrete Planks: Placement of precast concrete anchorage devices to structural steel. 3. Section 03 60 00 - Grouting: Grout for setting base plates. 4. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry: Supply of anchors for embedding into masonry. 5. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing. 6. Section 05 31 13 - Steel Floor Decking: Support framing for small openings in floor deck. 7. Section 05 31 23 - Steel Roof Decking: Support framing for small openings in roof deck. 8. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. 9. Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing: Fireproof protection to framing systems.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Note: All referenced codes to be latest version unless noted otherwise.
B. American Institute of Steel Construction: 1. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. 3. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 4. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
Hart Design Group Structural Steel Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 12 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
5. ASTM A193/A193M - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 6. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 7. ASTM A354 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners. 8. ASTM A449 - Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use. 9. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 10. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 11. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding. 12. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality. 13. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 14. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Structural Steel. 15. ASTM A588/A588M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. (100-mm) Thick. 16. ASTM A618/A618M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High- Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing. 17. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High- Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates. 18. ASTM A847/A847M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength, Low Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance. 19. ASTM A913/A913M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self-Tempering Process (QST). 20. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 21. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 22. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination Using Radiographic Film. 23. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments. 24. ASTM E165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination. 25. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination. 26. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 27. ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. 28. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 29. ASTM F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners. 30. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts and Assemblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120 ksi and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, and metric Dimensions 830 MPA and 1040 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength.
Hart Design Group Structural Steel Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 12 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
E. Research Council on Structural Connections: 1. RCSC - Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts.
F. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 2. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer. 3. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic). 4. SSPC SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 5. SSPC SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. 6. SSPC SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
B. Coordinate work with the following: 1. Section 05 21 00, 05 31 13, and 05 31 23 for framed openings other than structural steel. 2. Section 05 50 00 for miscellaneous steel supports other than structural steel. 3. Section 07 81 00 for finishes on structural steel receiving fireproofing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and bolts. 2. Connections. 3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength, destructive and non-destructive test analysis.
E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. Structural Steel: AISC 303, ASIC 341, and AISC 360. 2. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: AISC 303, Section 10. 3. High Strength Bolted Connections: RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.
Hart Design Group Structural Steel Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 12 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.
B. Erector: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.
C. Shop Painter: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.
D. Welders and Welding Procedures: AWS D1.1 qualified within previous 12 months.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Structural W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M; Grade 50.
B. Structural T-Shapes: Cut from structural W-shapes.
C. Channels and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M.
D. Round Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.
E. Rectangular Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.
F. Structural Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.
G. Structural Plates and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
H. Floor Plates: ASTM A786/A786M; raised pattern.
2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. Bolts: Heavy hex, structural type. 1. ASTM A325; Type 1, plain. 2. ASTM A490; Type 1, plain.
B. Nuts: ASTM A563; heavy hex type. 1. Finish: Plain.
C. Washers: ASTM F436; Type 1, circular. Furnish clipped washers where space limitations require. 1. Finish: Plain.
D. Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959; Type 325. 1. Finish: Mechanically galvanized.
Hart Design Group Structural Steel Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 12 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
E. Tension Control Assemblies: ASTM F1852; Type 1, heavy hex head, twist off type; complete with washers and heavy hex nuts. 1. Finish: Mechanically Galvanized
F. Anchor Rods: ASTM A307; Grade A. 1. Shape: Hooked. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M.
G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A307; Grade A. 1. Finish: Unfinished.
H. Forged Structural Steel Hardware: 1. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A108; Grade 1085. 2. Eye Nuts and Eye Bolts: ASTM A108; Grade 1030. 3. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A108; Grade 1018. 4. Rod Ends, Yoke Ends and Pins, Cotter Pins, and Coupling Nuts: Carbon steel.
2.3 WELDING MATERIALS
A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Continuously seal members joined with intermittent welds and plastic filler. Grind exposed welds smooth.
B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.
C. Develop required camber for members.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3.
B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, or in contact with concrete.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days.
B. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide.
C. Touch-Up Primer: Match shop primer.
Hart Design Group Structural Steel Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 12 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.
B. Shop test bolted and welded connections as specified for field quality control tests.
C. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination.
B. Verify bearing surfaces are at correct elevation.
C. Verify anchors rods are set in correct locations and arrangements with correct exposure for steel attachment.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation preparation.
B. Furnish templates for installation of anchor rods and embedments in concrete and masonry work.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
B. Field weld components indicated on Drawings.
C. Field connect members with threaded fasteners; torque to required resistance tighten to snug tight for bearing type connections.
D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer.
E. After erection, touch up welds and abrasions to match shop finishes.
3.4 GROUT INSTALLATION
A. Shim bearing plates and equipment supports to proper elevation, snug tighten anchor bolts.
B. Fill void under bearing surface with grout. Install and pack grout to remove air pockets.
Hart Design Group Structural Steel Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 12 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing Rev 0.docx CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Moist cure grout.
D. Remove forms after grout is set. Trim grout edges to from smooth surface, splayed 45 degrees.
E. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has cured for a minimum of 3 days.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
C. Maximum Offset From Alignment: 1/4 inch.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing.
B. Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC 303. 1. Visually inspect all bolted connections. 2. For Direct Tension Indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F959. Verify that gaps are less than gaps specified in Table 2.
C. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2. Visually inspect all welds. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164; perform on all full penetration welds.
D. Correct defective bolted connections and welds.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Structural Steel Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 12 00 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – S June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Load-bearing formed-steel stud interior wall framing. 2. Formed-steel joist framing and bridging.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 31 13 - Steel Floor Decking: Metal floor decking supported by wall stud metal framing. 2. Section 06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Rough wood blocking. 3. Section 07 21 16 - Blanket Insulation: Insulation within framing members. 4. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load-bearing metal stud framing.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Note: All referenced codes to be latest version unless noted otherwise.
B. American Iron and Steel Institute: 1. AISI General - Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions. 2. AISI Header - Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design. 3. AISI NAS - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 4. AISI WSD - Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Wall Stud Design.
C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. 2. ASTM A1003 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic- Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members. 3. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing Members.
E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers: 1. NAAMM ML/SFA 540 - Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual.
F. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Coating (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic).
G. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association: 1. SSMA - Product Technical Guide.
Hart Design Group Cold-Formed Metal Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 40 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – S June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, and limitations.
C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related Work. 2. Indicate stud, floor joist, and ceiling joist layout. 3. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted framing connections.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Mill Certifications: Submit mill certifications for steel delivered to Site. Certify steel bare metal thickness of 1 mil, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation in 2-inch or 8-inch gauge length, chemical analysis, and galvanized coating thickness.
G. Welders' Certificates: Certify welders and welding procedures employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Calculate structural properties of framing members according to AISI NAS.
B. Furnish framing materials according to SSMA - Product Technical Guide.
C. Perform Work according to following: 1. Framing: AISI General and AISI NAS. 2. Headers: AISI Header. 3. Wall Studs: AISI WSD.
D. Form, fabricate, provide, and connect components according to NAAMM ML/SFA 540 - Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' experience.
Hart Design Group Cold-Formed Metal Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 40 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – S June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years' experience.
C. Welders and Welding Procedures: AWS D.1 qualified within previous 12 months for employed weld types.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Size interior components to withstand design loads as follows: 1. Vertical Assembly: 10 psf positive and 10 psf negative.
B. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1:360 of span.
C. Wall System: 1. Design to AISI NAS, AISC General, and AISC Header. 2. Design to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. 3. Design system to accommodate: a. Construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. b. Expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members.
D. Select stud thickness to resist proposed loading or a minimum 10 psf uniform load and maximum L/360 deflection under all imposed loads.
2.2 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
A. Manufacturers: 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 2. Marino/WARE. 3. Nuconsteel, A Nucor Company. 4. Substitutions: Specified in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: ASTM C955.
2.3 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A1003. 2. Structural grade, Type H, metallic coated. 3. Grade: As required by performance requirements. 4. Coating: G60.
B. Studs:
Hart Design Group Cold-Formed Metal Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 40 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – S June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. Steel sheet, formed to channel shape, punched web, knurled faces. 2. Size: Thickness and depth as noted on Drawings.
C. Joists: 1. Steel sheet, formed to channel shape, solid web. 2. Size: Thickness and depth as noted on Drawings.
D. Track: 1. Steel sheet, formed to channel shape. 2. Width: Same as studs, tight fit. 3. Thickness: Minimum 0.0346 inch (33 mils). 4. Type: Solid web.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws and Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Steel, hot-dip galvanized.
B. Anchorage Devices: Power-actuated.
C. Welding: According to AWS D1.1.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate assemblies of formed sections of required sizes and profiles.
B. Fit, reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements.
C. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Site, ready for installation.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Touchup Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: 1. SSPC Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic. 2. ASTM A780.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Bracing, Furring, and Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined by performance requirements specified.
B. Plates, Gussets, and Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined by specified performance requirements.
Hart Design Group Cold-Formed Metal Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 40 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – S June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination.
B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive Work.
C. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Studs: 1. Align floor and ceiling tracks and locate to partition layout. 2. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24 inches o.c. 3. Place studs at 16 inches o.c., not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and at each side of openings. 4. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method. 5. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. 6. Double-stud wall openings, door jambs, and window jambs. 7. Erect load-bearing studs one piece, full length; splicing of studs not permitted. 8. Erect load-bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to achieve design requirements. 9. Fully seat axial-loaded studs in receiving tracks at maximum 1/16-inch gap between stud and track web. 10. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces after erection. 11. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. 12. Install studs with deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load-bearing framing. 13. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. 14. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items and to prevent stud rotation. 15. Touch up field welds and damaged metallic-coatings surfaces with primer to match shop coating.
B. Joists: 1. Install framing components. 2. Make provisions for erection stresses. 3. Install temporary bracing to maintain alignment until permanent bracing and attachments are installed. 4. Place joists at 16 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches from abutting walls. 5. Connect joists to supports using fastener method. 6. Set floor/ceiling joists parallel and level, using lateral bracing and bridging. 7. Locate joist end bearing directly over load-bearing studs, or install load-distributing member to top of stud track. 8. Install web stiffeners at reaction points as required. 9. Touch up field welds and damaged metallic-coatings surfaces with primer to match shop coating. 10. Complete framing ready to receive metal floor deck or concrete deck panels. Hart Design Group Cold-Formed Metal Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 40 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – S June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for tolerances.
B. Maximum Variation from Indicated Position: 1/4 inch.
C. Maximum Variation of Members from Plane: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Cold-Formed Metal Framing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 40 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes shop fabricated metal items. 1. Lintels. 2. Ledge and shelf angles. 3. Channel door frames. 4. Structural supports for miscellaneous attachments. 5. Stair nosings.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for embedded anchors and attachments for metal fabrications specified by this section in concrete. 2. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Execution requirements for embedded anchors and attachments for metal fabrications specified by this section in masonry. 3. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Structural steel column anchor bolts. 4. Section 05 31 13 - Steel Floor Decking: Bearing plates and angles for metal deck bearing, including anchorage. 5. Section 05 51 00 - Metal Stairs. 6. Section 05 52 00 - Metal Railings. 7. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field applied paint finish.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Note: All referenced codes to be latest version unless noted otherwise.
B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5. ASTM A354 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners. 6. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 7. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
Hart Design Group Metal Fabrications Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 50 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
8. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 9. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 10. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 11. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 12. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 13. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 14. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts and Assemblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120 ksi and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, and metric Dimensions 830 MPA and 1040 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength.
C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
D. National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association: 1. NOMMA Guideline 1 - Joint Finishes.
E. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 2. SSPC SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning. 3. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Finish joints in accordance with NOMMA Guideline 1.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
Hart Design Group Metal Fabrications Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 50 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Accept metal fabrications on site in labeled shipments. Inspect for damage or construction.
C. Protect metal fabrications from damage by exposure to weather.
1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL
A. Structural W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.
B. Channels and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M.
C. Steel Plate: ASTM A36/A36M.
D. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40.
F. Bolts: ASTM A325; Type 1. 1. Finish: Unfinished (interior locations) or Hot dipped galvanized (exterior locations).
G. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy hex type. 1. Finish: Unfinished (interior locations) or Hot dipped galvanized (exterior locations).
H. Washers: ASTM F436; Type 1. 1. Finish: Unfinished (interior locations) or Hot dipped galvanized (exterior locations).
I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
J. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide.
K. Touch-Up Primer: Match shop primer.
L. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 Type I Inorganic.
M. Welding Materials: AWS D1.6; type required for materials being welded.
2.2 LINTELS
A. Lintels: Steel sections, size and configuration as indicated on Drawings, length to allow 8 inches minimum bearing on both sides of opening. 1. Exterior Locations: Galvanized. 2. Interior Locations: Prime paint, one coat.
Hart Design Group Metal Fabrications Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 50 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.3 LEDGE AND SHELF ANGLES
A. Ledge and Shelf Angles, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking or joists; prime paint, two coats.
2.4 DOOR FRAMES
A. Door Frames: Steel channel sections, size indicated on Drawings, with jamb anchors suitable for building into masonry or attachment to steel framing, minimum 4 anchors per jamb; prime paint, one coat.
2.5 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Anchor Rods: ASTM A307; Grade A. 1. Shape: Hooked. 2. Furnish with nut and washer; unfinished.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C. Continuously seal joined members with intermittent welds and plastic filler.
D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.
2.7 FACTORY APPLIED FINISHES - STEEL
A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 2.
B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.
C. Prime paint items with two coats except where galvanizing is specified.
D. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M; hot dip galvanize after fabrication.
E. Galvanizing for Fasteners, Connectors, and Anchors: 1. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: ASTM A153/A153M. 2. Mechanical Galvanizing: ASTM B695; Class 50 minimum.
Hart Design Group Metal Fabrications Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 50 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.8 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate sections.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Install temporary bracing to maintain alignment, until permanent bracing and attachments are installed.
C. Field weld components indicated on Drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Obtain approval of Architect/Engineer prior to field cutting, welding, or making adjustments not scheduled.
F. After erection, touch up welds, abrasions, and damaged finishes with prime paint or galvanizing repair paint as appropriate to match shop finishes.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
Hart Design Group Metal Fabrications Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 50 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Rev 0.docx
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story or for every 12 ft in height whichever is greater, non-cumulative.
C. Maximum Offset From Alignment: 1/4 inch.
D. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Metal Fabrications Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 05 50 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Structural\05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Rev 0.docx R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No. : 20021B
SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes roof curbs; blocking in wall openings; concealed blocking for support of lab casework and wall cabinets; telephone and electrical panel boards; and preservative fire retardant treated wood.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 4. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A208.1 - Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard.
B. American Wood-Preservers’ Association: 1. AWPA M4 - Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products. 2. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood.
C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel 3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples.
D. Forest Stewardship Council: 1. FSC Guidelines - Forest Stewardship Council Guidelines.
E. The Redwood Inspection Service: 1. RIS - Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber.
F. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau: 1. SPIB - Standard-Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber.
G. U.S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology: 1. DOC PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
Hart Design Group Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 06 10 53 - 1 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No. : 20021B
2. DOC PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels. 3. DOC PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
H. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: 1. WCLIB - Standard-Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.
I. Western Wood Products Association: 1. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit technical data on wood preservative and fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Fire Retardant Treated Materials: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each preservative treated and fire retardant treated material.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules: AP&PA
B. Plywood: APA/EWA Rated Sheathing, Grade B-C; sanded.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: ASTM A153/A153M, hot dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Nails and Staples: ASTM F1667. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.
2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA U1, Commodity Specification A-Sawn Products or F-Wood Composites using ACQ preservative.
Hart Design Group Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 06 10 53 - 2 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No. : 20021B
B. Fire Retardant Treatment: Chemically treated and pressure impregnated, having flame spread of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 and showing no evidence of significant progressive combustion when test is continued for an additional 20 minute period, Interior Type.
C. Moisture Content after Treatment: Re-dried. 1. Lumber: Maximum 19 percent. 2. Structural Panels: Maximum 15 percent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify substrate conditions are ready to receive blocking, curbing and framing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of blocking, curbing and framing items.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.
B. Place horizontal members, crown side up.
C. Construct curb members of solid wood sections.
D. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.
E. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings, and roofing vapor retardant.
F. Space framing 16 inches o.c.
G. Secure sheathing to framing members with ends over firm bearing and staggered.
H. Install telephone and electrical panel boards with fire retardant plywood sheathing material where required. Size boards 12 inches beyond size of electrical and telephone panels.
Hart Design Group Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 06 10 53 - 3 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No. : 20021B
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. Roof Curbing: S/P/F species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, fire retardant pressure preservative treated.
B. Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: 3/4 inch thick, square edges.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 06 10 53 - 4 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Firestopping through-penetrations of fire rated assemblies.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board fireproofing. 2. Division 22 – Lab Gases
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 3. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 4. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to UL fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
C. Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed
Hart Design Group Firestopping Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 07 84 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\07 84 00 - Firestopping, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years’ experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five (5) years’ experience.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F.
C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of materials.
D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING
A. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Fire stopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 2. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent sealant that expands on exposure to surface heat gain.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.
B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard.
C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.
Hart Design Group Firestopping Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 07 84 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\07 84 00 - Firestopping, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter-affecting bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C. Install damming materials as required to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.
B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating.
D. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
Hart Design Group Firestopping Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 07 84 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\07 84 00 - Firestopping, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.7 SCHEDULES
Copper Tubing Hilti FS One Sealant 1-Hour rating Electrical Conduit Hilti FS One Sealant 1-Hour rating
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Firestopping Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 07 84 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\07 84 00 - Firestopping, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes steel doors and frames for rated and non-rated applications.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 3. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 4. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 5. Section 01 74 00 - Warranties and Bonds. 6. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. 7. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations, internal reinforcement, cutouts for glazing, and finishes.
B. Product Data: Submit door and frame configurations, location of cutouts for hardware reinforcement.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel doors and frames shall be “FM Approved”.
B. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. ANSI 250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. DHI - Door Hardware Institute - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames, and Builder's Hardware.
C. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Foam Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
D. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each foam plastic insulation material.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Manufacturers:
Hart Design Group Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 11 13 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. Ceco Door (Assa Abloy Door Group, Inc.). 2. Steelcraft. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: 1. Standard shop fabricated steel doors and frames; rated and non-rated types; flush face. 2. Stile & rail doors and steel frames; rated and non-rated types.
2.2 STANDARD STEEL DOORS:
A. Standard Steel Doors: These specifications are based on doors manufactured by Steelcraft.
B. Interior Doors, “L” Series (Non-Insulated): ANSI A250.8. 1. Door Service: Level 3; Heavy Duty; Model 1; full flush design. 2. Face Sheets: 18 gauge face sheets, cold-rolled steel. 3. Thickness: 1 ¾-inch thick. 4. Door Core: Laminated, cell Kraft honeycomb. 5. Top and Bottom Channels: 14 gauge inverted top and bottom channels. 6. Door Edges: Full height; epoxy-filled mechanical interlocking edges; visible seam edge. 7. Glass Lite Trim: Recessed “Dezigner” glass trim. 8. Glazing Preparation: Prep door for ¼-inch glazing. 9. Factory-applied baked-on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011 10. Hardware Preparation: Doors shall be prepared for all hardware components contained in Section 08 71 00 (Door Hardware) in accordance with ANSI A250.6.
C. Interior Doors, “T” Series (Temperature Rise): ANSI A250.8. 1. Door Service: Level 3; Heavy Duty; Model 1; full flush design. 2. Face Sheets: 18 gauge face sheets, cold-rolled steel. 3. Thickness: 1 ¾-inch thick. 4. Door Core: Mineral core. 5. Top and Bottom Channels: 14 gauge inverted top and bottom channels. 6. Door Edges: Full height; epoxy-filled mechanical interlocking edges; visible seam edge. 7. Factory-applied baked-on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011 8. Hardware Preparation: Doors shall be prepared for all hardware components contained in Section 08 71 00 (Door Hardware) in accordance with ANSI A250.6.
2.3 STEEL FRAMES (ALL DOORS)
A. Steel Frames (All Doors): This specification is based on door frames manufactured by Steelcraft. 1. All Door Frames:
Hart Design Group Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 11 13 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
a. Base Metal Thickness: 14 gauge cold-rolled steel. . b. Corner Connections: Welded. c. Frame Type: Double-rabbet frame. d. Frame Width: 2-inches (U.N.O.). e. Frame Anchors: Steel stud bracket anchor, welded (U.N.O).
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors and frames with hardware reinforcement welded in place.
B. Fabricate frames as face welded units.
C. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.
D. Prepare interior frames for silencers.
2.5 SHOP FINISHING ( DOORS AND FRAMES)
A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M G60 coating class.
B. Primer: Factory-applied baked-on rust-inhibiting primer paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10-1998.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8.
B. Coordinate installation of doors and frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08 71 00.
C. Coordinate door frames with gypsum board wall construction for frame anchor placement.
D. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor.
E. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 08 80 00.
F. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
Hart Design Group Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 11 13 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
G. Tolerances: Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16-inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 11 13 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, Rev 0.doc CLD & CCM Labs – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install door hardware as noted in this specification section.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 3. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 4. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 5. Section 01 74 00 - Warranties and Bonds. 6. Section 08 11 00 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 7. Division 16 - Electrical
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. 2. ANSI A156.2 - Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 3. ANSI A156.3 - Exit Devices. 4. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls - Closures. 5. ANSI A156.5 - Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products. 6. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim. 7. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinge Dimensions. 8. ANSI A156.8 - Door Controls - Overhead Holders. 9. ANSI A156.12 - Interconnected Locks and Latches. 10. ANSI A156.13 - Mortise Locks and Latches. 11. ANSI A156.14 - Sliding and Folding Door Hardware. 12. ANSI A156.15 - Closer Holder Release Devices. 13. ANSI A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware. 14. ANSI A156.18 - Materials and Finishes 15. ANSI A156.19 - Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors. 16. ANSI A156.23 - Electromagnetic Locks. 17. ANSI A156.24 - Delayed Egress Locks. 18. ANSI A156 - Complete Set of 24 BHMA Standards (A156 Series) with Binder.
B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association: 1. BHMA Directory of Certified Products.
C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows. 2. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
Hart Design Group Door Hardware Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 71 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 71 00 - Door Hardware (Rev 0).doc CLD & CCM Labs – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware. 3. UL - Building Materials Directory.
E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
C. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. ANSI A156 series. 2. NFPA 80. 3. UL 305.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three (3) years’ documented experience. 1. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with minimum three (3) years’ experience
B. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ qualified person to assist in work of this section.
Hart Design Group Door Hardware Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 71 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 71 00 - Door Hardware (Rev 0).doc CLD & CCM Labs – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Package hardware items individually with necessary fasteners, instructions, and installation templates, when necessary; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware and recessed items. 1. Provide templates or actual hardware as required to ensure proper preparation of doors and frames.
B. Sequence installation to accommodate required utility connections.
C. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during course of Work.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Section 01 74 00 - Warranties and Bonds.
B. Furnish five (5) year manufacturer’s warranty for locksets and door closers.
1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish special wrenches and tools applicable for each different and for each special hardware component.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR HARDWARE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Allegion (Ives, Schlage, Von Duprin, LCN). 2. Assa Abloy (Pemko, Sargent, Medeco, McKinney) 3. Stanley Hardware. 4. Dorma 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Hart Design Group Door Hardware Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 71 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 71 00 - Door Hardware (Rev 0).doc CLD & CCM Labs – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Door Hardware General Notes 1. Security hardware (Card reader, power supply, door contact, etc.) to be specified, provided, and wired by Cytiva’s Security Vendor. 2. Hardware Vendor to provide electrified locksets; confirm and coordinate specification of electrified lockets with Cytiva’s Security Vendor prior to lockset order. 3. Vendor to prepare door frames as required to accommodate security needs; coordinate with Cytiva’s Security Vendor. 4. See Contract Drawings (Arch.) for door handing/swing; orient lockset (cylinder) appropriately.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. General Hardware Requirements: Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable ANSI A156 standard for type of hardware required. Furnish each type of hardware with accessories as required for applications indicated and for complete, finished, operational doors. 1. Templates: Furnish templates or physical hardware items to door and frame manufacturers sufficiently in advance to avoid delay in Work. 2. Reinforcing Units: Furnished by door and frame manufacturers; coordinated by hardware supplier or hardware manufacturer. 3. Fasteners: Furnish as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required to secure hardware. a. Finish: Match hardware item being fastened. 4. Fire Ratings: Provide hardware with UL or Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed) listings for type of application involved. 5. Electrical Devices: Make provisions and coordinate requirements for electrical devices and connections for hardware.
B. Hinges: ANSI A156.1, full mortise type, 5-knuckle heavy weight hinge; FBB199 by Stanley (US26D), complying with following general requirements unless otherwise scheduled. 1. Widths: Sufficient to clear trim projection when door swings 180 degrees. 2. Number: Furnish minimum three (3) hinges for doors leafs up to 90 inches high, four (4) hinges for door leafs up to 120 inches high. 3. Size and Weight: 4-1/2 inch heavy weight typical for 1-3/4 inch doors. a. Doors over forty (40) inches wide: Extra heavy weight oil impregnated bearing hinges. 4. Pins: Furnish nonferrous hinges with non-removable pins (NRP). 5. Tips: Flush pins.
C. Concealed Electric Hinges: ANSI A156.1, full mortise type, 3-knuckle heavy weight hinge; TA786 QC8 by McKinney (US26D), complying with following general requirements unless otherwise scheduled. 1. Widths: Sufficient to clear trim projection when door swings 180 degrees. 2. Number: Furnish minimum three (3) hinges for doors leafs up to 90 inches high, four (4) hinges for door leafs up to 120 inches high.
Hart Design Group Door Hardware Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 71 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 71 00 - Door Hardware (Rev 0).doc CLD & CCM Labs – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3. Size and Weight: 4-1/2 inch heavy weight typical for 1-3/4 inch doors. a. Doors over forty (40) inches wide: Extra heavy weight oil impregnated bearing hinges. 4. Pins: Furnish nonferrous hinges with non-removable pins (NRP). 5. Tips: Flat pins.
D. Tubular Locksets: Furnish tubular locksets as indicated. Locksets shall be by Schlage, with a 2-3/4-inch backset. 1. Lockset Function: As noted in the “Hardware Set Schedule”. 2. Lever Design: to match existing; US26D. 3. As indicated in Schedule.
E. Mortise Locksets, Electrified: Furnish electrified mortise locksets as indicated. Locksets shall be 8200 Series by Sargent, with a 2-3/4-inch backset. 1. Lockset Function: As noted in the “Hardware Set Schedule”. 2. Lever Design: ‘J’ Lever; US26D. 3. Mech. Option 76, tactile warning (outside handle) where indicated. 4. Cylinder Option 72, SFIC 5. Prep as required for security / card access; coordinate work with Cytiva’s Security Vendor.
F. Closers: ANSI A156.4, Grade 1 modern type with cover, surface mounted closers, Series 4110 by LCN; full rack and pinion type with steel spring and non-freezing hydraulic fluid. 1. Adjustability: Furnish controls for regulating closing, latching, speeds, and back checking. 2. Arms: Parallel arm; mount as indicated in Schedule. 3. Operating Pressure: Maximum operating pressure as follows. a. Interior Doors: Maximum 5 pounds. b. Size: Per door width. c. Arm: Cush-N-Stop. d. Cover: Metal
G. Electric Strikes: ANSI 156.5; Grade 1; Von Duprin Model 6111.
H. Dustproof Strike: ANSI 156.16; Ives Model DP-2; spring-loaded plunger; US26D.
I. Electrical Power Supply: BY CYTIVA’S SECURITY VENDOR
J. Coordinators: ANSI 156.3, Type 21A; Ives Model COR with Ives Model FL filler bars as required; coordinator length to suit door(s) width; US26D.
K. Door Stops (Wall Mounted): ANSI 156.16; Ives Model WS407CVX; convex rubber bumper; US32D.
L. Door Stops (Floor Mounted): ANSI 156.16; Ives Model FS441: US26D.
M. Door Silencers: ANSI 156.16; Ives Model SR64; gray rubber.
Hart Design Group Door Hardware Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 71 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 71 00 - Door Hardware (Rev 0).doc CLD & CCM Labs – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
N. Kick Plate: ANSI 156.6; Ives Model 8400; 8-inches high x door width minus 2 inches; beveled four sides; US32D.
O. Door Contacts: BY CYTIVA’S SECURITY VENDOR. Contacts mounted in door and frame.
P. Door Bottom Sweep: Pemko Model 321CN; clear anodized aluminum with neoprene insert.
Q. Automatic Door Bottom: Pemko 4301CPKL.
R. Gasketing: Pemko Model S88W; compression bulb, adhesive-backed fire/smoke gasketing; white silicone; in compliance with the following standards: 1. NFPA 105. 2. Air infiltration tested in accordance with ASTM E-283-91 3. Air infiltration is 0.09 CFM/ft. of crack.
S. Card Reader: BY CYTIVA’S SECURITY VENDOR.
T. Request to Exit Device: BY CYTIVA’S SECURITY VENDOR.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify doors and frames are ready to receive door hardware and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate mounting heights with door and frame manufacturers. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
B. Mounting Heights from Finished Floor to Center Line of Hardware Item: Comply with manufacturer recommendations and applicable State and Local Building/Accessibility codes where not otherwise indicated. 1. Locksets: 38 inch. 2. Push/Pulls: 42 inch. 3. Dead Locks: 48 inch. 4. Push Pad Type Exit Devices: 42 inch. 5. Top Hinge: Jamb manufacturer’s standard, but not greater than 10 inches from head of frame to center line of hinge. 6. Bottom Hinge: Jamb manufacturer’s standard, but not greater than 12-1/2 inches from floor to center line of hinge. 7. Intermediate Hinges: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinges and from each other.
Hart Design Group Door Hardware Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 71 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 71 00 - Door Hardware (Rev 0).doc CLD & CCM Labs – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
8. Hinge Mortise on Door Leaf: 1/4 inch to 5/16 inch from stop side of door.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services
B. Primary Hardware Manufacturer’s Representatives inspect installation and certify hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or hardware finish.
3.6 HARDWARE SET SCHEDULE
A. The following hardware sets are intended to establish type and standard of quality when used together with the requirements outlined in this section. Examine Drawings and Specifications and furnish proper hardware for door openings.
Hardware Set No. 1 Description: Single Door, Lab Entry; Typ. Leaf Size(s): 3’-0” x 7’-0” with lite kit as shown. Doors: 49 (3) Hinges Stanley 4 ½ x 4 ½ US32D (1) Tubular Lockset Schlage Classroom Lock US26D** *match exist handle spec **match exist. (1) Closer, Pull-Side LCN 4110 Series * 689, Plated** *provide 180-degree operation **match exist. (1) Door Stop Ives WS407CVX US32D (3) Door Silencers Ives SR64 GRAY (1) Kick Plate Ives 8400, 8” US32D (1) Door Bottom Sweep Pemko 321CN Clear Anod. Alum. (1) Frame Gasket Pemko S88W BLACK
Hart Design Group Door Hardware Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 71 00 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 71 00 - Door Hardware (Rev 0).doc CLD & CCM Labs – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
Hardware Set No. 2 Description: Single Door, Lab Entry; Typ. Leaf Size(s): 3’-0” x 7’-0” with lite kit as shown. Doors: 52 (3) Hinges Stanley 4 ½ x 4 ½ US32D (1) Tubular Lockset Schlage* Entrance Lock US26D* *verify lock & handle spec, finish; match existing (1) Closer, Pull-Side LCN 4110 Series* 689, Plated* *verify spec, finish; match existing. (1) Door Stop Ives WS407CVX US32D (3) Door Silencers Ives SR64 GRAY (1) Kick Plate Ives 8400, 8” US32D (1) Door Bottom Sweep Pemko 321CN Clear Anod. Alum. (1) Frame Gasket Pemko S88W BLACK (1) Lite Kit As shown on drawings
Hardware Set No. 3 Description: Single Door, Autoclave Room; Typ. Leaf Size(s):3’-0” x 7’-0” with lite kit as shown. Doors: 65
(3) Hinges Stanley 4 ½ x 4 ½ US32D (1) Tubular Lockset Schlage* Storeroom Lock US26D* *verify lock & handle spec, finish; match existing (1) Closer, Pull-Side LCN 4110 Series* 689, Plated* *verify spec, finish; match existing. (1) Door Stop Ives WS407CVX US32D (3) Door Silencers Ives SR64 GRAY (1) Kick Plate Ives 8400, 8” US32D (1) Auto. Bot. Seal Pemko 4301CPKL Clear Anod. Alum. (1) Frame Gasket Pemko S88W BLACK (1) Door (1) Lite Kit As shown on drawings
Hardware Set No. 4 Description: Single Door, Gas Closet; Typ. Leaf Size(s):3’-0” x 7’-0” with lite kit as shown. Doors: 65A
(3) Hinges Stanley 4 ½ x 4 ½ US32D (1) Tubular Lockset Schlage* Classroom Lock US26D* *verify lock & handle spec, finish; match existing (1) Closer, Push-Side LCN 4110 Series* 689, Plated* *verify spec, finish; match existing. (3) Door Silencers Ives SR64 GRAY (2) Kick Plate Ives 8400, 8” US32D (1) Auto. Bot. Seal Pemko 4301CPKL Clear Anod. Alum. (1) Frame Gasket Pemko S88W BLACK (1) Door (1) Lite Kit As shown on drawings
Hart Design Group Door Hardware Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 71 00 - 8 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 71 00 - Door Hardware (Rev 0).doc CLD & CCM Labs – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
Retrofit Hardware Set R-1 Description: Single Door, Office – retrofit lite kit Doors: 42A Note: All other existing hardware to remain.
(1) Lite Kit As shown on drawings
Retrofit Hardware Set R-2 Description: Single Door, Quiet Room – retrofit lite kit Doors: 51 Note: All other existing hardware to remain.
(1) Lite Kit As shown on drawings (1) Door Stop Ives* WS407CVX US32D * replace door stop if damaged or missing, verify in field. (3) Door Silencers Ives* SR64 GRAY * replace door silencers if damaged or missing, verify in field. (1) Kick Plate Ives 8400, 8” US32D (1) Frame Gasket Pemko* S88W BLACK (1) Door * replace frame gasket if damaged or missing, verify in field
______Retrofit Hardware Set R-3 Description: Double Door, Bio-R Lab 54 Doors: X54 Note: All other existing hardware to remain. (2) Door Stop Ives WS407CVX US32D (2) Door Silencers Ives SR64 GRAY (1) Door Coordinator Ives COR, Model FL US26D (2) Kick Plate Ives 8400, 8” US32D (2) Auto. Bot. Seal Pemko 4301CPKL Clear Anod. Alum. (1) Frame Gasket Pemko S88W BLACK (1) Door
Retrofit Hardware Set R-4 Description: Single Door, BSL-2 Lab 57 Doors: X57 Note: All other existing hardware to remain. (1) Door Stop Ives FS441 US26D (3) Door Silencers Ives SR64 GRAY (1) Kick Plate Ives 8400, 8” US32D (1) Auto. Bot. Seal Pemko 4301CPKL Clear Anod. Alum. (1) Frame Gasket Pemko S88W BLACK (1) Door
Hart Design Group Door Hardware Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 71 00 - 9 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 71 00 - Door Hardware (Rev 0).doc CLD & CCM Labs – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
Retrofit Hardware Set R-5 Description: Single Door, conference room – retrofit card reader Doors: x62 Note: All other existing hardware to remain. (1) Electrified Hinge Specify to match existing (1) Electrified Lockset Specify to match existing (1) Card Reader BY CYTIVA’S SECURITY VENDOR (1) Door Contacts BY CYTIVA’S SECURITY VENDOR (1) Power Supply BY CYTIVA’S SECURITY VENDOR (1) Req. to Exit Device BY CYTIVA’S SECURITY VENDOR
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Door Hardware Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 71 00 - 10 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 71 00 - Door Hardware (Rev 0).doc R& D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Glass in hollow metal interior doors. 2. Glass in hollow metal interior windows.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 3. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 4. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 5. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings Safety.
B. American Society of Civil Engineers: 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C103 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 2. ASTM C162 - Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products. 3. ASTM C509 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material. 4. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. 5. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 6. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 7. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 8. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. 9. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 10. ASTM C1349 - Standard Specification for Architectural Flat Glass Clad Polycarbonate. 11. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass. 12. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 13. ASTM D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics.
Hart Design Group Glazing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 80 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 80 00 - Glazing, Rev 0.doc R& D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
14. ASTM D4802 - Standard Specification for Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet. 15. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 16. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 17. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 18. ASTM E546 - Standard Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 19. ASTM E576 – Standard Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in the Vertical Position. 20. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings. 21. ASTM E1425 - Standard Practice for Determining the Acoustical Performance of Windows, Doors, Skylight, and Glazed Wall Systems. 22. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation. 23. ASTM E1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. 24. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.
D. Consumer Products Safety Commission: 1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing.
E. Deutsches Institut für Normung: 1. DIN 18516-4 - Back-ventilated, Non-Loadbearing, External Enclosures of Buildings, Made from Tempered Safety Glass Panels - Requirements and Testing.
F. Glass Association of North America: 1. GANA - Sealant Manual. 2. GANA - Glazing Manual. 3. GANA - Laminated Glass Design Guide. 4. GANA 89-1-6 - Specification for Environmental Durability of Fully Tempered or Heat-Strengthened Spandrel Glass with Applied Opacifiers.
G. National Fenestration Rating Council Incorporated: 1. NFRC 100 - Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors. 2. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence. 3. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and Systems.
Hart Design Group Glazing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 80 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 80 00 - Glazing, Rev 0.doc R& D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
H. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows.
2. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. NFPA 257 - Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.
I. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
J. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL - Building Materials Directory.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Not Used.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement as calculated in accordance with applicable code as required.
B. Interior Glass Deflection: Maximum differential deflection for two adjacent unsupported edges when 50 lb/lf force is applied to one panel at any point up to 42 inches above finished floor less than thickness of glass.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: 1. Glass: Provide structural, physical, and thermal and solar optical performance characteristics, size limitations, and special handling or installation requirements. 2. Glazing Sealants, Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors where exposed.
C. Installer's Certificate: Certify glass furnished without identification label is installed in accordance with Construction Documents and applicable code.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods.
Hart Design Group Glazing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 80 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 80 00 - Glazing, Rev 0.doc R& D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five (5) years’ experience.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass Manufacturers: 1. PPG Industries. 2. Pilkington North America, Inc. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Quality Q3, Kind FT fully tempered, Condition A uncoated, float glass with horizontal tempering. 1. Furnish tempered glass conforming to CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Category II at all door and borrowed lite locations. 2. To provide a hermetically sealed and dehydrated space, an aluminum spacer with three bent corners and one keyed-soldered corner or four bent corners shall separate lites and one straight butyl injected zinc-plated steel straight key joint.
2.2 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing Materials: Select glazing sealants, tapes, gaskets and additional glazing materials of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, glazing channel substrates, etc. under conditions of installations and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
B. Setting Blocks: 100% silicone material recommended by glass manufacturer, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.
Hart Design Group Glazing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 80 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 80 00 - Glazing, Rev 0.doc R& D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings for glazing are correctly sized and within acceptable tolerance.
B. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions impeding moisture movement; weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual. 1. Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C1193. 2. Fire Rated Openings: Comply with NFPA 80.
B. Install products using the recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials.
C. Prevent glass from contact with contaminating substances that result from construction operations such as weld splatter, fire-safing or plastering.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after Work is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Glazing Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 08 80 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\08 80 00 - Glazing, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.3 SUMMARY
A. Section includes metal stud wall framing, metal joist ceiling framing and gypsum board and joint treatment.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 4. Section 01 74 00 - Warranties and Bonds
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 2. ASTM C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board. 3. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. 4. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 5. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 6. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 7. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 8. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness. 9. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases. 10. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories. 11. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water- Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. 12. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing. 13. ASTM C1288 - Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior Substrate Sheets. 14. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets. 15. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
Hart Design Group Gypsum Board Assemblies Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 21 16 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
16. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 17. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 18. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 19. ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples.
B. Gypsum Association: 1. GA 214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 2. GA 216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 3. GA 600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual Sound Control.
C. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings.
D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 265 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels and Walls, Method B. 2. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish.
E. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Select stud thickness to resist minimum 5 psf uniform load and maximum 1/240 deflection.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on metal wall and ceiling framing members, gypsum board, joint tape, joint compound, and trim accessories required for a complete installation.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840.
Hart Design Group Gypsum Board Assemblies Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 21 16 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years’ documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five (5) years’ documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers: 1. G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. National Gypsum Co. 3. United States Gypsum Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 COMPONENTS
B. Framing Materials: 1. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 0.036-inch thick, C shape, with knurled faces. 2. Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ASTM C645. 3. Fasteners: ASTM C1002; length to suit application. 4. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application to rigidly secure materials in place. 5. Adhesive: ASTM C557.
C. Gypsum Board Materials: ASTM C1396/C1396M; Type X fire resistant. 1. 5/8-inch thick, maximum available length in place; ends square cut, tapered edges.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
D. Gypsum Board Accessories: ASTM C1047; metal; corner beads, edge trim, and expansion joints. 1. Metal Accessories: Galvanized steel.
E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M; reinforcing tape, joint compound, and water.
F. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C954; length to suit application. 1. Screws for Steel Framing: Type S.
Hart Design Group Gypsum Board Assemblies Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 21 16 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Extend existing gypsum board installations using materials and methods as specified.
B. Repair and remodel existing gypsum board assemblies that remain or are to be altered.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Metal Stud Installation: 1. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754. 2. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center, U.N.O. 3. Extend stud framing to ceiling only. Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling framing in accordance with details indicated. 4. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending stud framing through ceiling to structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. 5. Door/Window Opening Framing: Install double studs at door/window frame jambs. 6. Blocking: Screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and any other wall-mounted items.
B. Gypsum Board Installation: 1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840. 2. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 3. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 4. Double Layer Applications: Use gypsum base for first layer, placed perpendicular to framing or furring members. Use fire rated gypsum base for fire rated partitions and ceilings. 5. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. 6. Place control joints in long wall lengths at distances not to exceed 30 feet. Place control joints above door frames directly above each jamb, extending to the full height of the wall. 7. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
Hart Design Group Gypsum Board Assemblies Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 21 16 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Joint Treatment: 1. Finish in accordance with GA-214 Level 5.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from Flat Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Gypsum Board Assemblies Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 21 16 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations - BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim, and acoustic tile.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 4. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements 5. Division 21 - Fire Suppression 6. Division 22 - Plumbing 7. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 8. Division 26 - Electrical
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 2. ASTM C636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. 3. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 4. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 5. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 6. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. 7. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
B. Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association: 1. CISCA - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice.
C. Green Seal: 1. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements.
D. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings.
E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth.
Hart Design Group Acoustical Ceiling System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 51 13 - 1 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 51 13 - Acoustical Ceiling System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations - BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Suspension System: Rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1: 240.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on metal grid system components, and acoustic units.
C. Samples: Submit two full size samples illustrating material and finish of acoustic units.
D. Samples: Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and perimeter molding.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to CISCA requirements.
B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years’ experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five (5) years’ experience approved by manufacturer.
C. Provide seismic design of suspended ceiling under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Massachusetts.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one (1) week prior to commencing work of this Section.
Hart Design Group Acoustical Ceiling System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 51 13 - 2 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 51 13 - Acoustical Ceiling System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations - BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustic unit installation.
1.9 SEQUENCING
A. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work: Requirements for sequencing.
B. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until, sufficient heat is provided, dust-generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
C. Install acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish 240 sq. ft. of extra tile to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. ACS-1 (Acoustic Ceiling System is to match existing; specification below is based on material specifications received from the Owner. Contractor to verify before procurement/installation), Optima Tegular (#3252), conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Composition: Fiberglass with DuraBrite acoustically transparent membrane, anti- microbial, mold & sag resistant. 4. Density: 1.0 lb. /sq. ft. 5. Light Reflectance: 0.88. 6. NRC: 0.90 7. CAC: N/A 8. AC: 190. 9. Edge: 15/16 Square Tegular. 10. Fire Performance: Class A. 11. Surface Color: White.
Hart Design Group Acoustical Ceiling System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 51 13 - 3 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 51 13 - Acoustical Ceiling System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations - BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
12. Surface Finish: Acoustically transparent membrane with factory-applied latex paint.
B. CRCS-1 (Clean Room Ceiling System is to match existing; specification below is based on material specifications provide by the Owner. Contractor to verify before procurement/installation), USG Sheet Rock Lay-in Clima Plus Vinyl (#3270), conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inches. 3. Composition: Face laminated gypsum panel, anti-mold/mildew, & sag resistant. 4. Density: 2.09 sq. /ft. 5. Light Reflectance: 0.77. 6. NRC Range: N/A. 7. CAC: 35. 8. Edge: Square Lay-in 9. Fire Performance: Class A. 10. Surface Color: White. 11. Surface Finish: Vinyl faced membrane.
C. ACS – 1 Grid (Grid is to match existing; specification is based on material specification provide by the Owner. Contractor to verify before procurement/installation), Prelude XL, 15/16” (#7300), conforming to the following: 1. Material: Hot-dipped, galvanized steel. 2. Surface Color: White. 3. Surface Finish: Baked polyester paint or powder-coated paint.
D. CRCS – 1 Grid (Clean Room Ceiling Grid is to match existing; specification below is based on material specifications provide by the Owner. Contractor to verify before procurement/installation), CLEAN ROOM Steel, 1-1/2” (#7901 Exposed Tee System) conforming to the following: 1. Material: 1-1/2” Hot-dipped, galvanized steel – Gasketed. 2. Surface Color: White. 3. Surface Finish: Baked polyester paint.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustic and grid units. 1. Interior Flat and Non-Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS-11.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
Hart Design Group Acoustical Ceiling System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 51 13 - 4 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 51 13 - Acoustical Ceiling System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations - BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Lay-In Grid Suspension System: 1. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C635, ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this section. 2. Install system in accordance with ASTM E580/E580M. 3. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to deflection of 1/240 maximum. 4. Lay out all areas, including acoustic / clean room tile “start points” as detailed on the Contract Drawings. 5. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. 6. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 7. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance. 8. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners when weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. 9. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 10. Perimeter Molding: a. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces. b. Use longest practical lengths. c. Overlap corners. d. Install at junctions with other interruptions. 11. Form to accommodate plus or minus one (1) inch movement. Maintain visual closure.
B. Acoustic / Clean Room Units: 1. Fit acoustic / clean room units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. 2. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. 3. Install acoustic / clean room units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. 4. Cutting Acoustic / Clean Room Units: a. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. b. Double cut and field paint exposed edges of tegular units, and lay-in units as required.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Acoustical Ceiling System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 51 13 - 5 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 51 13 - Acoustical Ceiling System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING – VINYL SHEET
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 – Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The work of this Section includes: 1. Homogeneous Vinyl Sheet flooring. 2. Responsibilities, preparation/installation.
B. References (Industry Standards): 1. American Society for Testing and Materials International a. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus b. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension c. ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine d. ASTM D2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness e. ASTM D3389 Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics Abrasion Resistance (Rotary Platform, Double Head Abrader) f. ASTM D6499 Standard Test Method for The Immunological Measurement of Antigenic Protein in Natural Rubber and its Products g. ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements h. ASTM E648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source i. ASTM E662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials j. ASTM E1745 Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs k. ASTM E2179 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Effectiveness of Floor Coverings in Reducing Impact Sound Transmission Through Concrete Floors l. ASTM E2180 Standard Test Method for Determining the Activity of Incorporated Antimicrobial Agent(s) in Polymeric or Hydrophobic Materials
Hart Design Group Resilient Flooring Cumberland, RI 09 65 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring - Vinyl Sheet, Rev 0.docx R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
m. ASTM F386 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials Having Flat Surfaces n. ASTM F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring o. ASTM F925 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring p. ASTM F970 Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit q. ASTM F1482 Standard Practice for Installation and Preparation of Panel Type Underlayments to Receive Resilient Flooring r. ASTM F1514 Standard Test Method for Measuring Heat Stability of Resilient Flooring by Color s. ASTM F1859 Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing t. ASTM F1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base u. ASTM F1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride v. ASTM F1913 Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing w. ASTM F2169 Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads x. ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ probes y. ASTM F2199 Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensional Stability of Resilient Floor Tile after Exposure to Heat z. ASTM G21 Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi
2. International Organization for Standardization a. ISO 140 Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements
3. National Fire Protection Association a. NFPA 253 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source b. NFPA 258 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit shop drawings, seaming plans, coving details, and manufacturer's technical data, installation and maintenance instructions, and Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each material proposed for use. B. Samples: Submit the manufacturer’s standard samples of each product in color specified, with complimenting welding rod, and applicable accessories for verification.
Hart Design Group Resilient Flooring Cumberland, RI 09 65 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring - Vinyl Sheet, Rev 0.docx R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer with Single Source Responsibility: Provide resilient flooring manufactured by a firm with a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience with resilient flooring using heat-welded seams of type’s equivalent to those specified. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer should be certified as Armstrong Commercial Flooring Certified Installers. C. Fire performance Characteristics: Provide resilient sheet flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing material in accordance with ASTM test methods indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or testing agency acceptable to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/sq.cm. or greater, Class 1. ASTM E662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density or 450 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperatures, and construction operations. B. Deliver materials sufficiently in advance of installation to condition materials to the required temperature for 48 hours prior to installation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature and humidity at service levels or 68° F (20° C), ± 5° F (3° C), and 50% RH ± 10% in areas to receive resilient flooring. Specified temperature should be maintained at least 48 hours before, during, and 8 hours after installation.
1.7 EXTENDED SYSTEM LIMITED WARRANTY
A. Resilient Flooring System: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace system (subfloor preparation products, adhesive, and floor covering) that fails within the warranty period. B. Limited Warranty Period: 10 years on top of the Resilient Flooring Limited Warranty C. The installation of an Armstrong Flooring product along with the recommended Armstrong Flooring adhesive, as well as any Strong System subfloor preparation products, provides ten (10) additional years of limited warranty coverage. The Strong System limited warranty covers the installation integrity for the length of the flooring product warranty plus ten (10) years. In order to qualify for the Strong System Warranty, any subfloor preparation product needed for an installation must be an Armstrong Flooring product. D. For the System Limited Warranty to be valid, this product is required to be installed using the appropriate Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation System. Product installed not using the specific instructions from the Guaranteed Installation System will void the warranty. E. When Armstrong Flooring Strong System subfloor preparation products are used with other manufacturers’ floor coverings, adhesives, or other subfloor preparation products, Armstrong
Hart Design Group Resilient Flooring Cumberland, RI 09 65 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring - Vinyl Sheet, Rev 0.docx R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
Flooring warrants our products to be free from manufacturing defects from the date of purchase through the limited warranty period of 15 years.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials from same production run as products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.
1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of flooring units equal to five (5%) percent of amount installed. 2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Resilient sheet flooring, wall base, adhesives and subfloor preparation products and accessories:
1. Armstrong Flooring Inc., 2500 Columbia Avenue, Lancaster, PA 17603, www.armstrongflooring.com/commercial 2. Manufacturer must have a headquarters in the United States of America
2.2 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING MATERIALS
A. Provide Homogeneous Sheet Vinyl Flooring: Medintone™ with Diamond 10® Technology manufactured by Armstrong Flooring Inc.
1. Description: An unbacked, nonlayered, homogeneous sheet vinyl flooring. Protected by a diamond-infused UV-cured polyurethane finish, the colors and pattern detail are dispersed uniformly throughout the thickness of the product. Color pigments are insoluble in water, resistant to cleaning agents, and light. 2. Homogeneous sheet flooring shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F1913 Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing 3. Pattern and Color: Color as selected by Architect/Engineer from the range currently available from Armstrong Flooring Inc. 4. Width: 6 ft. 7 in. (2.0 m). 5. Length: up to 65.6 lineal feet (20 meters) 6. Thickness: 0.080 in. (2.0 mm)
B. Vinyl Weld Rod:
Hart Design Group Resilient Flooring Cumberland, RI 09 65 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring - Vinyl Sheet, Rev 0.docx R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. Provide solid color or patterned vinyl weld rod as produced by Armstrong Flooring Inc., and intended for heat welding of seams. Color shall be compatible with field color of flooring and as selected by Architect/Engineer to contrast with field color of flooring from the range currently available from Armstrong Flooring Inc.
C. Seam Adhesive:
1. Provide Armstrong Flooring S-761 Seam Adhesive at seams as recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer.
2.3 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION
A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted because of the specific attributes listed in Section 2.2 above.
2.4 WALL BASE MATERIALS
A. For integral flash cove base: Provide integral flash cove wall base by extending sheet flooring 4 in. (10.16 cm) up the wall using adhesive, welding rod, and accessories recommended and approved by the flooring manufacturer.
2.5 ADHESIVES
A. Provide Armstrong S-599 Vinyl Sheet Flooring Adhesive Premium Commercial adhesive for field areas and Armstrong S-580 Flash Cove Adhesive at flash coving as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. B. Provide Armstrong S-543 Commercial Sheet Flooring and LVT Adhesive for field areas and Armstrong S-580 Flash Cove Adhesive at flash coving as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. C. For non-heat welded seams: Provide Armstrong Flooring S-761 Seam Adhesive at seams as recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. For patching, smoothing, and leveling monolithic subfloors (concrete, terrazzo, quarry tile, ceramic tile, and certain metals), provide Armstrong S-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment or as recommended by the manufacturer to provide a level base for installation of sheet flooring material. . B. For creating a moisture barrier, provide S-452 Seal Strong™ two-part moisture mitigation system. C. Provide top edge trim caps of anodized aluminum for integral flash cove as approved by the Architect/Engineer and approved by the manufacturer. D. Provide transition/reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials.
Hart Design Group Resilient Flooring Cumberland, RI 09 65 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring - Vinyl Sheet, Rev 0.docx R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including technical bulletins, product catalog, installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation and maintenance procedures as needed.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions (i.e. moisture tests, bond test, pH test, etc.). B. Visually inspect flooring materials, adhesives, and accessories prior to installation. Flooring material with visual defects shall not be installed and shall not be considered as a legitimate claim. C. Examine subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material. D. Inspect subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing, sealing, parting and hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive removers; and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold, or mildew. E. Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. F. Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the subfloor. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Subfloor Preparation: Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints, and other defects with Armstrong Flooring S-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment or as recommended by the flooring manufacturer to provide a level base for installation of sheet flooring material. Refer to Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 and ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring for additional information on subfloor preparation. B. Subfloor Preparation Moisture Mitigation: Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints, mitigate moisture and other defects with Armstrong Flooring S-454 Prime Strong™ acrylic primer for porous substrates or as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Refer to Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 and ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring for additional information on subfloor preparation.
Hart Design Group Resilient Flooring Cumberland, RI 09 65 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring - Vinyl Sheet, Rev 0.docx R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Subfloor Cleaning: The surface shall be free of dust, solvents, varnish, paint, wax, oil, grease, sealers, release agents, curing compounds, residual adhesive, adhesive removers and other foreign materials that might affect the adhesion of resilient flooring to the concrete or cause a discoloration of the flooring from below. Remove residual adhesives as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove curing and hardening compounds not compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a bond test or by the compound manufacturer's recommendations for flooring. Avoid organic solvents. Spray paints, permanent markers and other indelible ink markers must not be used to write on the back of the flooring material or used to mark the concrete slab as they could bleed through, telegraphing up to the surface and permanently staining the flooring material. If these contaminants are present on the substrate they must be mechanically removed prior to the installation of the flooring material. Refer to the Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 and ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring for additional information on subfloor preparation. D. When using S-599 Adhesive, perform subfloor moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F 2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Slabs Using in-situ Probes, ASTM F 1869,Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride, and Bond Tests as described in publication F-5061, Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems, manual, to determine if surfaces are dry; free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring. Internal relative humidity of the concrete shall not exceed 90%. On installations where both the Percent Relative Humidity and the Moisture Vapor Emission Rate tests are conducted, results for both tests shall comply with the allowable limits listed above. Do not proceed with flooring installation until results of moisture tests are acceptable. All test results shall be documented and retained. E. When using Armstrong Flooring S-543 Adhesive perform subfloor moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F 2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Slabs Using in-situ Probes, ASTM F 1869,Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride, and Bond Tests as described in publication F-5061, Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems, manual, to determine if surfaces are dry; free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring. Internal relative humidity of the concrete shall not exceed 90%. On installations where both the Percent Relative Humidity and the Moisture Vapor Emission Rate tests are conducted, results for both tests shall comply with the allowable limits listed above. Do not proceed with flooring installation until results of moisture tests are acceptable. All test results shall be documented and retained. F. Concrete pH Testing: Perform pH tests on concrete floors regardless of their age or grade level. All test results shall be documented and retained.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLOORING
A. Install flooring in strict accordance with the latest edition of Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061. Failure to comply may result in voiding the manufacturer’s warranty listed in Section 1.7.
Hart Design Group Resilient Flooring Cumberland, RI 09 65 00 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring - Vinyl Sheet, Rev 0.docx R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of furniture, equipment, movable partitions, etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces of fixed lab casework, door recesses, closets, and similar openings as shown on the drawings. C. Scribe, cut, and fit or flash cove to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes, outlets, and built-in furniture and cabinets. D. Adhere flooring to the subfloor without cracks, voids, raising and puckering at the seams. Roll with a 100-pound (45.36 kilogram) roller in the field areas. Hand-roll flooring at the perimeter and the seams to assure adhesion. Refer to specific rolling instructions of the flooring manufacturer. E. Lay flooring to provide a minimum number of seams. Avoid cross seams, filler pieces, and strips. Match edges for color shading and pattern at the seams in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. F. Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times, and working times. G. Prepare heat-welded seams with special routing tool supplied for this purpose and heat weld with vinyl welding rod in seams. Use methods and sequence of work in conformance with written instructions of the flooring manufacturer. Finish all seams flush and free from voids, recesses, and raised areas. H. Provide integral flash cove wall base where shown on the drawings, including cove fillet support strip and top edge cap trim. Construct flash cove base in accordance with the flooring manufacturer's instructions. Heat-weld seams as specified for those on the floor.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Apply top set wall base to walls, columns, casework, and other permanent fixtures in areas where top-set base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practical, with inside corners fabricated from base materials that are mitered or coped. Tightly bond base to vertical substrate with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. B. Fill voids with plastic filler along the top edge of the resilient wall base or integral cove cap on masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates. C. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring, and secure with adhesive recommended by the edge strip manufacturer. Install edge strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. D. Apply butt-type metal edge strips where shown on the drawings, before flooring installation. Secure units to the substrate, complying with the edge strip manufacturer's recommendations.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Perform initial and on-going maintenance according to the latest edition of the maintenance recommendations for Medintech and Medintone.
Hart Design Group Resilient Flooring Cumberland, RI 09 65 00 - 8 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring - Vinyl Sheet, Rev 0.docx R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer against damage from rolling loads, other trades, or the placement of fixtures and furnishings. (See Finishing the Job in the latest edition of Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061.)
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Resilient Flooring Cumberland, RI 09 65 00 - 9 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring - Vinyl Sheet, Rev 0.docx R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes resilient tile flooring and resilient base.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 4. Section 01 63 13 - Product Substitutions 5. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. 2. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing. 3. ASTM F1344 - Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile. 4. ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile. 5. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.
B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux for Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
C. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C. Samples: 1. Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for initial selection.
Hart Design Group Resilient Tile Flooring Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 65 19 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. Provide suggested schedule for cleaning and refinishing.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: provide resilient vinyl composition tile flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing material in accordance with the ASTM test methods indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or other testing agency suitable to the Authorities having Jurisdiction:
1. ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/sq. cm. or greater, Class I. 2. ASTM E 662 (Smoke generation) maximum Specific Optical density of 450 or less. 3. CAN/ULC – S102.2 Flame Spread Rating and Smoke Developed: results as tested.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years (3) experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years (3) experience.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Store in a clean, dry enclosed space off the ground, protected from harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and accessories in the space they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.
C. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.
Hart Design Group Resilient Tile Flooring Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 65 19 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish one hundred (100) sq. ft. of flooring of each type and color specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Resilient tile flooring, wall base, adhesives and subfloor preparation products and accessories: 1. Armstrong Flooring, Inc., 2500 Columbia Avenue, Lancaster, PA 17604. www.armstrongflooring.com/commercial. 2. Substitutions with prior approval by Architect/Engineer per Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 TILE FLOORING
A. Provide Vinyl Composition Tile: Standard Excelon Imperial Texture with Diamond 10 Technology tile flooring manufactured by Armstrong Flooring, Inc. 1. Description: Tile composed of polyvinyl chloride resin, plasticizers, fillers, stabilizers, and pigments. Vinyl composition tile shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 1066, “Standard Specification Composition Floor Tile”, Class 2, through-pattern. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inch. (305 mm x 305 mm). 3. Thickness: 1/8”/0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 4. Pattern and Color: Selected from the range currently available from Armstrong Flooring, Inc.
2.3 RESILIENT BASE
A. For top set wall base: Provide 1/8 inch x 4 inch high Armstrong Flooring Color- Integrated Wall Base with a matte finish, conforming to ASTM F 1861, Type TP-Rubber, Thermoplastic, Group 1-Solid, Style B-Cove.
2.4 ADHESIVES A. For Tile High-Moisture Installation Warranty, Full Spread: Provide Armstrong S-525 BBT® Bio-Flooring Adhesive under the tile and Armstrong S-725 Wall Base Adhesive at the wall base as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
Hart Design Group Resilient Tile Flooring Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 65 19 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. For patching, smoothing, and leveling monolithic subfloors (concrete, terrazzo, quarry tile, ceramic tile, and certain metals), provide Armstrong S-453 Level Strong™ cement based self-leveling compound.
B. For priming porous substrates to aid in adhesive bond strength and reducing subfloor porosity, provide S-454 Prime Strong™ acrylic primer for porous substrates. For non- porous substrates, provide S-455 Prime Strong™ acrylic primer for non-porous substrates.
C. For creating a moisture barrier, provide S-452 Seal Strong™ two-part moisture mitigation system.
D. For sealing joints between the top of wall base or integral cove cap and irregular wall surfaces such as masonry, provide plastic filler applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Provide transition/reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials.
F. Provide full width resilient edge strips to transition to adjacent Carpet Tile, with bullnose edge, with color as selected by the Architect/Engineer from standard colors available. G. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions (i.e. moisture tests, bond test, pH test, etc.).
C. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances capable of impairing adhesion of new adhesive and finish materials.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.
B. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
Hart Design Group Resilient Tile Flooring Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 65 19 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Clean substrate.
D. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-thru" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed.
3.3 EXISTING WORK
A. Extend existing resilient tile flooring installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF - TILE FLOORING
A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed.
B. Lay resilient tile flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.
C. Install resilient tile flooring in monochromatic pattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at area perimeter.
D. Scribe resilient tile flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.
E. Terminate resilient tile flooring under centerline of Perforated Wall partition.
F. Install edge strips where tile flooring terminates.
3.5 INSTALLATION - BASE
A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
B. Miter internal corners. At exposed ends, use premolded units.
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
C. Clean, seal, and maintain resilient tile flooring products.
Hart Design Group Resilient Tile Flooring Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 65 19 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction.
B. Prohibit traffic on resilient tile flooring for forty-eight (48) hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Resilient Tile Flooring Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 65 19 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 09 67 16 RESINOUS FLOOR SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish all materials, equipment, incidentals and labor required, as shown on drawings and as indicated herein. Work items are as follows: 1. Perform crack, joint and detail treatment preparation work. 2. Prepare floor and wall surfaces and, install repair materials as required following removal of existing finishes. 3. Install finish floor system with integral cove base where indicated on drawings.
B. The work will consist of the installation of epoxy flooring systems in the areas as described on the room finish schedule. This specification has been written around the products of Stonhard, Maple Shade, N.J. 08052 (www.stonhard.com) 1. New Epoxy Flooring Systems on Existing/New Concrete Floors - After proper floor preparation, the floor will be coated the Stonhard system listed in Part 2 of this specification. The ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE, Dwg. A-602, denotes where the flooring system is applied.
C. Related Sections 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 4. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection: Joint between base and wall surface.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology used in this Section is in accordance with definitions contained in ASTM D16, ASTM D3960, and the following definitions: 1. Floor System Work: The aspects involved with proper application of the specified floor system including, but not limited to cleaning, surface preparation, mixing, application, curing, and quality control for all applied material. 2. Floor System Manufacturer (FSM): Refers to the approved Floor System Manufacturer. 3. Floor System Thickness: The total thickness of primer, body coat(s), grout coat(s), top or finish coats, exclusive of concrete repair materials and, as applicable, moisture vapor reduction system. 4. Laitance: A layer of weak, non-durable concrete containing cement fines that is brought to the surface through bleed water as a result of concrete finishing and/or over-finishing. 5. Resurfacing Material: A layer of cementitious and/or resinous-based material used to fill or otherwise restore surface continuity to worn or damaged concrete surfaces.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
6. Resurfacing Material Manufacturer (RMM): Refers to the approved Resurfacing Manufacturer. 7. Sealant Installation: The installation of specified primers and sealants to concrete joints (control, cold or expansion) following the installation of the finished floor system. 8. Single Lift: The maximum thickness of a resurfacer that can be applied via a single application and devoid of cold joint(s).
1.3 REFERENCES
A. This Section contains references to the documents listed below. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.
B. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of bid opening. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued, or replaced.
C. Referenced publications found within this specification shall be the latest revision at the time of bid opening unless otherwise specified; and applicable parts of the referenced publications shall become a part of this specification as if fully included.
D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C307 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. 2. ASTM C413 - Standard Test Method for Absorption of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 3. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 4. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical- Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 5. ASTM C580 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 6. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. 7. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 8. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness. 9. ASTM D3960 - Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
10. ASTM D4060 - Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. 11. ASTM D4138 - Standard Test Methods for Measurement Dry Film Thickness of Protective Coating Systems by Destructive Means. 12. ASTM D4259 - Practice for Abrading Concrete. 13. ASTM D4262 - Standard Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Acid Etched Concrete Surfaces. 14. ASTM D4414 - Standard Practice for Measurement - Wet Film Thickness by V Notch Gages. 15. ASTM E337 - Standard Practice Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer. 16. ASTM F1679 - Test Method for Using a Variable Incidence Tribometer (VIT).
E. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 1. CSA A23.26B - Method of Test to Determine Adhesion by Tensile Load.
F. Federal Standard Colors 1. F 595 B - Federal Standard Colors.
G. International Concrete Restoration Institute (ICRI) 1. Guideline No. 03732 - Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays.
H. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) 1. NACE Publication 6D-173 - A Manual for Painter Safety. 2. NACE RP0288 - Standard Recommended Practice, Inspection of Linings on Steel and Concrete.
I. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 1 - Good Painting Practice and Volume 2 - Systems and Specifications. 2. SSPC-Guide 12 - Guide for Coating Concrete. 3. SSPC-PA-3 - A Guide to Safety in Paint Application. 4. SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete
J. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA) 1. 1915.35 - Standards - 29 CFR – Painting
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's current printed recommendations and product data sheets for all products including, but not limited to, performance criteria, surface preparation and mixing, application and safety requirements.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any materials to be brought on-site including all materials including, abrasive blast media or any other materials intended to be used shall be submitted prior to being brought on site. 3. Storage requirements including temperature, humidity, and ventilation for all materials. 4. Color and texture samples indicating for option(s) selected. Samples shall be 6” x 6” minimum. 5. Daily reports that contain the following information: substrate conditions, ambient conditions, application procedures, work completed and location thereof. As appropriate, mark-up drawings that show location of work. 6. Letter(s) certifying that surfaces to be treated have been prepared in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and are ready for installation work, citing location thereof. As appropriate, mark-up drawings that show location of work. 7. Letter(s) signed by FSM and RMM certifying that submitted products are suitable for application on the surfaces to be treated and for the service conditions. 8. Personnel Qualifications - As applicable for individual personnel submit the following: a. Project references including project location, description of similar work performed, project reference contact name and current telephone number and date when work was performed to document that the Contractor's supervising foreman and other personnel have at least five (5) years’ of experience in the last ten (10) years performing the same type of work specified. b. Written certification from the approved FSM AND RMM with the names of personnel that have successfully completed the training required in this Section. 9. A detailed list of all electrical requirements including voltage, phase, amps and plug type(s) required for each piece of equipment. 10. A complete list of the types and quantities of all anticipated hazardous and wastes that will be generated by the project. 11. A detailed schedule with quote including labor resourcing that identifies the number of personnel scheduled for work. 12. A one (1) year warranty for materials and a one (1) year warranty for application.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, procedures for stain removal, repairing surface, and suggested schedule for cleaning.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten (10) years’ experience.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum ten (10) years’ experience.
C. The Contractor is ultimately responsible for the workmanship and quality of the work. Inspection by others does not limit the Contractor's responsibility.
D. Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, or diluted materials. Do not use materials from previously opened containers.
E. Use only products of the approved FSM and RMM. Provide same products for touch-up as for original.
F. Resurfacing materials shall either be manufactured or recommended in writing by the FSM.
G. Make available all locations and phases of the work for access by others. The Contractor shall provide egress to safely access the work areas for inspection.
H. Conduct work so that all products are installed as specified herein. Inspect work continually to ensure that materials are installed as specified herein. The Contractor shall inspect the work to determine conformance with the specifications and referenced documents. The Contractor shall inform the Architect/Owner of the progress and the quality of the work through daily reports as specified in 1.4. Any nonconforming work shall be corrected as specified herein or as recommended by the FSM and RMM.
I. The Contractor shall at all time have a superintendent or supervisor in charge who is thoroughly familiar with the work in progress. The superintendent or supervisor shall represent the Contractor and shall have authority to receive and execute all instructions given by the Architect/Owner.
J. Experience of Personnel - The requirements for experience of personnel shall meet Paragraph 1 or 2 below: 1. The work specified in this Section shall be performed by personnel with a minimum of five (5) years of experience with preparing concrete surfaces and installing the same type of materials on projects that have been completed within the last ten (10) years and the personnel will be authorized in writing as approved applicators by the specified FSM and RMM. 2. Personnel performing surface preparation and installation work shall be trained by the FSM’s/ and RMM’s technical representatives’ for a minimum of 24 hours and a written letter from the manufacturers’ shall be submitted to the Architect/Owner certifying by name that all personnel to perform work have successfully completed the required training. Training by the manufacturers’ shall not be on the work covered by this Contract.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Materials shall be stored in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather and excessive heat or cold per manufacturer’s recommendations. Flammable materials shall be stored in accordance with state and local codes and per Owner requirements.
C. Store all materials only in areas designated by Owner solely for that purpose. Confine mixing, thinning, associated operations, clean up and storage of materials and related debris to authorized areas. All materials are to be stored on pallets or similar storage/handling skids off the ground in sheltered areas in which the storage temperature is maintained per manufacturer recommendations.
D. Materials exceeding shelf or storage life as stipulated by the FSM and RMM shall not be brought onsite.
E. Mix all materials in a designated enclosed mixing area. This enclosed area must protect the mixing operation and materials from direct sunlight, inclement weather, freezing, or other means of damage or contamination. Protect all surfaces and equipment from any spillage of material(s) within the mixing area.
F. The Contractor shall take all precautions and implement all measures necessary to avert potential hazards associated with all materials as described on the pertinent Material Safety Data Sheets or container labels.
G. Deliver all materials to the job site in their original, unopened containers. Each container shall bear the manufacturer's name and label. 1. Labels on all material containers must show the following information: a. Name or title of product. b. Federal specification number if applicable. c. Manufacturer's batch number and date of manufacture. d. Manufacturer's name. e. Generic type of material. f. Application and mixing instructions. g. Hazardous material identification label. h. Shelf life date. i. Storage requirements. 2. All containers shall be clearly marked indicating any personnel safety hazards associated with the use of or exposure to the materials. 3. All materials shall be handled and stored to prevent damage or loss of label.
1.8 SAFETY
A. General - Personnel safety is the Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor is responsible for assuring compliance with all applicable federal, state, and local safety requirements as well as the Owner’s safety requirements.
B. The Contractor's work forces should comply with all applicable federal, state, local and Owner regulations and the provisions outlined in the following documents: 1. SSPC-PA 3 - “A Guide to Safety in Paint Application” 2. NACE Publication - “A Manual for Painter Safety” 3. RIDEM and EPA Regulations
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
4. The Owner’s Environmental Health Safety Requirements for Contractors
C. The Contractor shall provide personnel with all safety equipment necessary to protect them during any phase of the work. This shall include, but not be limited to safety glasses with permanent attached side shields, face shields, goggles, earplugs, hard hats, sturdy leather or other suitable protective work shoes or boots, appropriate personal protective clothing, gloves and approved respiratory protection as defined in the MSDS.
D. Equipment, power tools are to be in good working order to avoid open sparking. Cords shall be free of breaks, exposed wires and shall not have been modified. All manufacturer installed safety devices shall be operational and not modified.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS, WORK AREAS AND SEQUENCING
A. The work areas on the job site will be designated by the Owner. The Contractor's personnel shall not be permitted in any area other than those expressly designated by the Owner. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner regarding completion times, safety, access and other factors that can affect operations and the availability of work areas to determine if work can be performed within the entire area or a portion thereof of any given time.
B. The Contractor is hereby advised that other tradesperson may be working in the areas at the same time.
1.10 SCOPE OF WORK CONFIRMATION
A. The contractor is responsible to thoroughly review all Contract Documents including, but not limited to, specification and drawings. This includes verification of dimensions and quantities. The Architect/Owner shall be notified in writing of any discrepancies, deficiencies, omissions or errors in the contract documents prior to bid award.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to advise the Architect/Owner of all items of work not specifically shown in the contract documents but required to complete the scope of work. Failure to do so shall be interpreted as willingness of the Contractor to include all such items at no additional cost.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Comply with FSM and RMM recommendations regarding environmental conditions under which materials can be applied.
C. Maintain minimum temperature in storage area between 60 and 85 degrees F.
D. Do not apply materials when dust is being generated.
E. Maintain ambient temperature required by manufacturer 72 hours prior to, during, and 48 hours after installation of materials.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Supply four (4) complete units of each flooring material (including sand and aggregates) and color for the Owner’s use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EPOXY FLOORING COMPONENTS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Stonhard 2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Stonshield HRI, color(s) as selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer’s standard color range: 3/16” thick, trowel applied slip resistant epoxy with colored quartz and chemical resistant topcoat floor system comprised of the following products: 1. Standard primer: A two-component, epoxy-based priming system. 2. Stonshield HRI base: A three-component, troweled mortar base consisting of epoxy resin, curing agent and finely graded silica aggregate. 3. Stonshield Undercoat: A three-component, free-flowing epoxy formulation consisting of resin, curing agent and fine aggregate. 4. Stonshield Aggregate: Brightly colored, quartz broadcast aggregate. 5. Stonshield Sealer: A two-component, high-performance, UV resistant, clear epoxy sealer.
2.2 RESURFACING MATERIALS
A. Per FSM recommendations.
2.3 SEALANT MATERIAL
A. Follow the recommendations of FSM using color-matched materials as approved by the Architect.
2.4 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF STONHARD PRODUCTS
A. Stonshield HRI: 1. Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi after 7 days in accordance with ASTM C579. 2. Tensile Strength: 2,000 psi in accordance with ASTM C307. 3. Flexural Strength: 4,300 psi in accordance with ASTM C580. 4. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 2.0 x 106 psi in accordance with ASTM C580. 5. Hardness: 85 - 90 in accordance with ASTM D-2240/Shore D Durometer. 6. Bond Strength: >400 psi (100% concrete failure) in accordance with ASTM D4541). 7. Impact Resistance: >160 in/lbs. in accordance with ASTM D4226. 8. Abrasion Resistance: 0.06 gm maximum weight loss in accordance with ASTM D4060, CS-17 wheel. 9. Coefficient of Friction: 0.80 in accordance with ASTM D2047.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 8 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
10. Flammability: Self-extinguishing in accordance with ASTM D635. Extent of burning 0.25 inches maximum. 11. Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 1.8 x 10-5 in/inºC in accordance with ASTM C531. 12. Water Absorption: 0.1% in accordance with ASTM C413. 13. Heat Resistance Limitation: 140ºF/60ºC (continuous exposure), 200ºF/93ºC (intermittent spills). 14. Cure Rate at 77ºF/25ºC: 12 hours for foot traffic, 24 hours for normal operations.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Cove base will be 4-inches in height.
B. Control Joint Strips: Joint strips shall be stainless steel and shall match the thickness of the new flooring system.
C. Expansion and Construction Joints in Existing Concrete Slabs: A flexible material, compatible with the flooring materials shall be placed at all construction/expansion joints in the new flooring system to correspond with joint locations in the concrete underlayment (concrete slab).
D. Subfloor Filler: Materials used to fill-in (patch) any voids or imperfection in the concrete slab work will be as recommended by Stonhard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify existing concrete floors are acceptable to flooring manufacturer for flooring finish application.
C. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances capable of impairing adhesion of adhesive and finish materials.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces as required by manufacturer for each of the flooring surfaces specified. In general, this will require that all substrates be dry and free of all wax, grease, oils, fats, soil, loose or foreign materials and laitance. Laitance and un-bonded cement particles must be removed by mechanical methods, i.e. abrasive blasting or scarifying. Other contaminants may be removed by scrubbing with a heavy-duty industrial detergent (Stonkleen DG9) and rinsing with clean water. The surface must show open pores throughout and have a sandpaper texture.
B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 9 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Grind irregularities above surface level. Prohibit traffic until materials are cured.
D. Clean substrate.
3.3 INITIAL INSPECTION OF SURFACES
A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to inspect and report unacceptable surface conditions to the Architect/Owner prior to the commencement of surface preparation activities. Unacceptable surface conditions are defined as the presence of cracked substrate surfaces, deteriorated substrates with deep depressions or extremely thin material thickness not acceptable for material application.
3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General Requirements 1. All specified surface preparation shall be performed in accordance with the latest version of the ASTM, ICRI, NACE and SSPC standards as referenced herein. Employ methods as specified herein to ensure that the level of cleanliness and surface profile, as specified herein, are attained for concrete substrates without damaging the substrate. 2. Cleaning, surface preparation and material application shall be scheduled so that dust and spray from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly resurfaced or coated substrates. 3. If between final surface preparation, resurfacing and coating work, contamination of the prepared and cleaned substrates occurs, or if the prepared substrates’ appearance darken or change color, re-cleaning shall be required until the specified degree of cleanliness is reclaimed. 4. All phases of surface preparation work specified herein must be approved by the Architect/Owner before the supplier proceeds with the subsequent phase of surface preparation. 5. Perform field quality control inspection and testing as specified herein. 6. Ground fault interrupters shall be used on all electrical equipment used.
B. Surface Preparation Methods 1. Floor System Removal and Detail Treatment Equipment - Only electric and pneumatic powered equipment and hand tools are permitted for removal and detail treatment surface preparation work. The use of gas-powered equipment of any type is strictly prohibited. 2. Centrifugal Vacuum Assisted Abrasive Blast Cleaning - Closed-system, vacuum assisted, electric powered equipment (‘Shotblaster’) with steel shot abrasive media shall be used to clean concrete and impart the surface profile for all open or field areas. 3. Mechanical Scarification - Vacuum-assisted grinders, power sanders and other equipment shall be used to clean concrete and impart surface profile only in areas that are inaccessible to centrifugal vacuum assisted abrasive blast cleaning equipment.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 10 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Specific Surface Preparation Requirements 1. Completely remove all existing floor finish materials, joint sealants and all loose, cracked, un-adhered or otherwise unsound resurfacing or concrete substrate material. The vertical portion of the cove base may remain where indicated on drawings. Sawcut through existing finish floor system as close to the wall (cove) as possible. 2. At all embedded metal components (i.e. drains and cleanouts), provide 1/2” deep sawcut in the concrete at the interface between the terminating edge of floor system and the embedment and 1/16” deep sawcut 3” outward from terminating edge. Chip concrete within the 3” zone to create a shouldered/sloped chase. 3. Sawcut existing cracks 1/4” x 1/4” (minimum) in substrate. 4. Completely remove all dust, dirt, debris and other deleterious materials. 5. Use methods as delineated in SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6 and ICRI Guideline No. 03732 to prepare concrete surfaces to produce a sound, clean substrate free of laitance, surface contaminants, loose materials, or otherwise deleterious substances. 6. The perimeter of all areas to receive surfacing materials shall be sawcut, at a depth equal to the thickness of the resurfacing material, and squared-off as required. For resinous surfacing materials, follow RMM recommendations relative to surface preparation and detail treatment. 7. The surface profile of area to be surfaced shall be 25% of depth of material to be applied with maximum 1/2" profile for deep repairs. Unless directed otherwise by the Architect/Engineer, installed resurfacing materials shall be prepared in the same manner as non-resurfaced areas based on material(s) to be subsequently applied. 8. Thoroughly vacuum clean all concrete surfaces to be treated to remove all loose dust, dirt, and spent abrasive leaving a dust free, sound concrete substrate prior to the application of any materials. 9. For coating application, surface preparation shall remove all existing coating materials and produce a minimum, uniform substrate surface condition equal to ICRI CSP 5. 10. Where non-movable equipment/component legs, pads or footings contact the existing floor finish, place sawcuts completely through the finish floor system 1” out from the contact areas. Box-out areas with above non-movable equipment providing straight and even sawcuts around the accessible perimeter areas of any given non-movable component. 11. Remove all debris from the surfaces to be treated by vacuum cleaning. It shall not be deposited in sumps, drains, dumpsters or elsewhere on the Owner’s property unless previously approved by the Owner. 12. For partial removal of existing finished floor system sections, in addition to the above requirements, do so as follows: a. Provide 1/2” wide x 3/4” deep sawcut at terminating edge of finish floor system to be replaced. On the interior side/within the section to be removed, sawcut completely through the existing finish floor system. That sawcut shall be a minimum of 6” inward from the initial terminating
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 11 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
edge sawcut and parallel to it. Aggressively abrade the concrete within the 6” zone per CSP 7. b. Chip the existing floor finish within the 6” (minimum) area bordered by the parallel sawcuts removing all existing finish floor material(s) within the section. Chipping shall be done parallel (not perpendicular) to the saw cuts to not disturb the adjacent existing floor finish areas that are to remain.
3.5 GENERAL MATERIAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Products shall not be used until the FSM’s and/or RMM’s representative has instructed the Contractor and Architect/Owner in the surface preparation, mixing, and application of products.
B. Succeeding materials shall not be applied until previously applied materials have been inspected.
C. Unless specified elsewhere herein, the Contractor shall comply with the FSM's/RMM’s most recent written instructions with respect to the following: 1. Mixing of all materials 2. Protection and handling of all materials 3. Recoat limitation and cure times 4. Minimum ambient and substrate temperatures, substrate's degree of dryness, relative humidity, and dew point of air 5. Application 6. Final curing
D. The applied material system shall be protected from damage during curing and shall be cured as recommended by the FSM AND RMM.
E. Substrate Moisture: Follow material manufacturers’ recommendations with regard to substrate moisture, substrate temperature, moisture vapor emissions and monitoring and testing thereof prior to the installation of coatings and resurfacers.
F. The surface area covered by a unit of material for various types of surfaces shall not exceed those recommended by the manufacturer.
3.6 SPECIFIC MATERIAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete Substrate Cracks 1. Fill prepared cracks per FSM’s written recommendations using products as manufactured by the FSM or as approved by the FSM. 2. Allow crack fill material to cure per FSM written instructions prior to the application of floor system materials.
B. Resurfacing 1. Determine the depth of areas requiring resurfacing and install the appropriate resurfacer based on depth requirement and FSM’s and RMM’s recommendations.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 12 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2. Follow RMM’s recommendations regarding the addition of aggregate for surfacing materials only based on material application thickness. 3. Apply resurfacing materials at thickness as required to restore surface continuity without interruption or alteration to pitch or slope. Surfacing materials shall be flush with adjacent existing concrete. 4. Fully compact surfacing, grout materials, and ensure that there are no voids. 5. Unless stipulated otherwise by the FSM/RMM, impart hard-troweled finish. 6. When resurfacing and grouting over concrete joints, either block-out joints to prohibit material from filling or fill and place nails in joints in order to precisely locate joints following material installation. Following material installation, provide sawcut(s) completely through resurfacing material at the same width as the original concrete substrate joint width. 7. Carefully follow the RMM’s written instructions (as applicable) regarding prime coat, scrub coat and or pre-wetting of substrate surfaces prior to the application of resurfacing materials. 8. Cure materials per FSM’s/RMM’s written instructions. Do not use sealers or curing agents.
C. Floor System Materials 1. Carefully proportion all flooring materials using marked beakers or other suitable graduated cylinders. Otherwise, mix complete units as supplied by the FSM. 2. Dedicated personnel responsible for that task shall perform all mixing only. 3. All products shall be thoroughly mixed per the FSM’s written instruction for the complete time period recommended. 4. As applicable, materials shall not be thinned or reduced beyond manufacturer recommendations to obtain the proper application characteristics. Thinners (as applicable) shall be as recommended by the specific material manufacturer. 5. Prior to floor system application over concrete joints, place nails or other suitable location indicators in joints in order to precisely locate joints following floor system material installation. In addition, precisely mark the location on plan drawings of all joints that are to be cut where sealant/joint-fill material is to be installed following floor system installation. 6. Use tools as recommended by the FSM for floor system installation. 7. For trowel application, fully compact flooring material to ensure that no voids or entrapped air remains. 8. For partial replacement, apply tape to leading edges of existing floor system edges that are to remain. Remove tape following each system layer, prior to curing of that layer. 9. Newly placed floor materials shall meet flush with adjacent existing flooring areas that are to remain. Transitions between field areas of the finished floor and the cove base shall be seamless. 10. Cove base shall match existing base radius and height found in the adjacent Formulation Lab, Room 205 (approx. 4-inches high). 11. Following floor system material installation over concrete joints, provide sawcuts completely through resurfacer at the same width as the original concrete substrate joint width and install the specified sealant material flush with adjacent finish floor surfaces.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 13 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Inspection by the Architect/Owner does not limit the Contractor's responsibilities for quality control inspection and testing as specified herein or as required by FSM/RMM instructions.
B. Perform the quality control procedures listed below in conjunction with the requirements of this Section. 1. Inspect all materials upon receipt to ensure that the approved manufacturer supplies all. 2. Provide specified storage conditions for the all materials, solvents, and abrasives. 3. Inspect and record findings for the degree of cleanliness of substrates using standards as referenced in this specification. 4. Unless stipulated otherwise by the FSM and RMM, perform substrate moisture tests per ASTM D 4263 for every 250 sq. ft. (or less) area. Do not apply coating or lining materials until acceptable results are obtained. The presence of no moisture on plastic sheet constitutes an acceptable result. As required, perform other moisture tests per the recommendation of the FSM/RMM. 5. Measure and record ambient air temperature once every two hours of each shift use a thermometer, measure, and record substrate temperature once every two hours using a surface thermometer. 6. Measure and record relative humidity every two hours of each shift using a sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E 337. 7. Provide correct mixing of all materials in accordance with the manufacturer instructions. 8. Verify curing of the coating in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 9. Perform slip resistance testing per ASTM F 609; Standard Test Method for Using a Horizontal Pull Slipmeter (HPS). Testing shall be done nine (9) times for each separate area of 500 sq. ft. or less, fifteen (15) times for each separate area between 500 sq. ft. and 1, 500 sq. ft. and twenty one (21) times for each separate area between 1,500 sq. ft. and 3,500 sq. ft. One (1) high measurement and one (1) low measurement shall be discarded and the average of the remaining measurement shall be used as the basis for acceptance. 10. Upon completion of any installed material(s), surfaces shall remain or be cleaned and prepared to permit close visual inspection by the Architect/Owner at any given location. The Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner will mark any and all deficiencies or defective work (not in compliance with this Section or related Sections) for repair or removal/replacement.
3.8 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. General: 1. All surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with the specification and referenced standards therein.
B. Surfacing material work:
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 14 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. All surfaced areas shall be flush with adjacent concrete surfaces, fully compacted, free of hollowness, voids, protrusions, cracks (of any length, width or depth), trowel marks or embedded deleterious matter. 2. Ensure that resurfacing have sufficiently cured prior to the application of remaining floor system components as per FSM and RMM requirements.
C. Floor System Application Work: 1. Dry Film Thickness (DFT) by individual coats or resurfacing layers must meet the requirements of this specification. 2. Film thickness tolerance variations in Dry Film Thickness for this work shall be as follows: a. Under specified Minimum DFT: 0.0 mils b. Over specified Maximum DFT: Per System Manufacturer recommendations. 3. Slip resistance testing shall meet the FSM’s current written coefficient of friction as tested via ASTM F 609 Standard Test Method for Using a Horizontal Pull Slipmeter (HPS). 4. Acceptable work will be based upon the following: a. Complete hiding of previously applied coats. b. No runs, sags, sloughs ridges, trowel marks, protrusions, or depressions. c. No pinholes or holidays in either size or frequency. d. Specified film thickness within specified tolerances. e. No intercoat or intracoat bond failures between coats. f. No interruption of impedance of door swings or other equipment moving or stationary. g. Complete curing of applied materials. h. Uniform finish color and texture. i. No show-through of substrate cracks or resurfacing materials in finishes. j. Straight and even terminations to existing finish floor surfaces, devoid of depression and/or ridges. k. No interruption in pitch, slope or elevation from original (pre-existing floor system removal condition). l. Uncracked, completely sealed joints full and flush with adjacent finish floor surfaces. m. Unimpeded access for removal of all existing floor drains, clean-outs or other covers/plates shall not be restricted. n. Slip resistance meeting manufacturer’s current written coefficient of friction. 5. Rework required on any “holidays” or any other inadequacies found by the Architect/Owner in the quality of the resurfacing or coating work shall be marked. Such areas shall be re-cleaned and recoated by the Contractor according to these specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations at no additional cost to the Owner.
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 15 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
6. The Contractor is responsible for keeping the Architect/Owner informed of all progress so that inspection for quality can be achieved in a productive and supportive manner. 7. No embedded dirt or debris will be allowed in the applied materials. Any show- through of dirt, debris or other deleterious material must be removed and the area resurfaced and/or recoated as required until the acceptance criteria is met. Any such required rework shall not result in additional cost to the Owner. 8. The Owner reserves the right to perform destructive tests, as required to confirm specification compliance.
3.9 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the coating work, the Contractor shall remove surplus materials, equipment, protective coverings, and accumulated rubbish, and thoroughly clean all surfaces and repair any overspray, spatter or other related damage. The surrounding surface areas including and all other surfaces shall be restored to their pre-project condition.
B. All hazardous waste generated by the project shall be managed by the contractor in conformance with the Owner’s policies, procedures and all applicable laws and regulations. Collection and disposal of any hazardous waste generated on the Owner’s property shall be accomplished by the contractor in accordance with the Owner’s policies, procedures and applicable laws and regulations.
3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Cover or otherwise protect finish work or other surfaces not being treated.
B. Do not coat over nameplates, tagging or other identification devices on equipment, piping, etc.
C. Erect and maintain protective tarps and/or maskings to contain debris generated during any and all work activities from adversely affecting personnel or property within the work area. This includes, but is not limited to, the use of dust/debris collection apparatus as required.
D. Prohibit traffic on floor finish until cured.
E. Barricade area to protect flooring until cured.
3.11 FINAL INSPECTION
Perform a final inspection to determine whether the material system work meets the requirements of the specifications. The Architect/Owner will conduct final inspection with the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Resinous Floor System Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 67 16 - 16 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 67 16 - Resinous Floor System, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No. 20021B
SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Section includes carpet tile, fully adhered using the full spread method for direct- glued installation on base, and accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Carpet and Rug Institute: 1. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. 2. CRI Green Label Plus Testing Program.
B. Consumer Products Safety Commission: 1. CPSC 16 CFR 1630 - Standard for the Surface Flammability of Carpets and Rugs.
C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux for Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
D. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention as occurs.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Supply eight (8) additional carpet tiles of color and pattern selected.
Hart Design Group Tile Carpeting Cumberland, RI 02864 09 68 13 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No. 20021B
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Mannington Commercial. 2. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Carpet Tile Type: Textured patterned loop, ECONNYL 100% regenerated Type 6 nylon manufactured by Mannington Commercial. 1. Collection: Urban Grid Collection 2. Style: Elevation 3. Tile Size: 18 x 36 inch, nominal. 4. Color: Crosstown #11212 at OPEN OFFICE AREA (Rm. 42) and OPEN OFFICE AREA (Rm. 47).
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: Latex-type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
B. Adhesive: Infinity 2 Adhesive. 1. Base Cap: Tarkett, Inc., UV-resistant, rubber wall (cove) base, color as selected by Architect/Engineer to match existing color in OPEN OFFICE AREA (Rm. 42) and OPEN OFFICE AREA (Rm. 47).
C. Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify floor surfaces are structurally sound, clean, dust-free, and level.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler per carpet tile manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
Hart Design Group Tile Carpeting Cumberland, RI 02864 09 68 13 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No. 20021B
C. Clean substrate.
D. Insure subfloor meets carpet tile manufacturer’s requirements for installation, including, but not limited to floor temperature, floor pH, and water vapor transmission.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install carpet tile in accordance with carpet tile manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Do not mix carpet from different cartons unless from same dye lot.
C. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
D. Install carpet tile in pattern to match existing remaining in OPEN OFFICE AREA (Rm. 42) for both rooms.
E. Locate change of floor materials between rooms under door centerline.
F. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate using the full spread method.
G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
C. Clean and vacuum carpet tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Tile Carpeting Cumberland, RI 02864 09 68 13 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and field application of paints.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 3. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 4. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 5. Section 01 74 00 - Warranties and Bonds. 6. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors, (Windows), and Frames. 7. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Wallboard Assemblies.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications. 2. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials. 3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. Green Seal: 1. GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints. 2. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements.
C. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America: 1. PDCA - Architectural Painting Specification Manual.
D. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings.
E. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
Hart Design Group Painting and Coating Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 90 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 90 00 - Painting and Coating, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on paints and primers.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special surface preparation procedures, and substrate conditions requiring special attention.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Fire Retardant Finishes: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten (10 years’ experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five (5) years’ experience.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
C. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
D. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Hart Design Group Painting and Coating Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 90 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 90 00 - Painting and Coating, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature ranges required by paint product manufacturer.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; U.N.O. by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft. candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.10 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence application to the following: 1. Do not apply finish coats until paintable sealant is applied.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Section 01 74 00 - Warranties and Bonds: Product warranties and product bonds.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Supply two (2) gallon for each color, type, and surface texture; store where directed by Owner.
B. Label each container with color, type, texture, and room locations in addition to manufacturer's label.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINTS AND COATINGS
A. Manufacturers: Paints and Primers: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company, Inc. 2. Substitutions: Permitted only with Architect/Engineer’s prior approval.
B. Basis of Design: The product names and model numbers presented in this specification are based on the products of the Sherwin-Williams Company, Inc.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare coatings: 1. To soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
Hart Design Group Painting and Coating Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 90 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 90 00 - Painting and Coating, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Accessory Materials: Other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified; commercial quality.
C. Patching Materials: Latex filler.
D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate conditions are ready to receive Work as instructed by product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report conditions capable of affecting proper application.
C. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces capable of affecting work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings exhibiting surface defects.
C. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
D. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.
E. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
F. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize
Hart Design Group Painting and Coating Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 90 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 90 00 - Painting and Coating, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
high alkali surfaces.
G. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
H. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.3 EXISTING WORK
A. Extend existing paint and coatings installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations and as specified.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.
B. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless specified otherwise.
C. Sand metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that may constitute fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.
B. Remove paint from adjacent surfaces not scheduled to be painted.
3.7 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES
A. Primed Ferrous Metals, Hollow Metal Doors, Windows, and Frames, Lintels, etc. - Semi-Gloss Finish: 1. 1st Coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W02600; 1.4 mils DFT. 2. 2nd Coat: Pro Industrial, Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, K46-150 Series (Semi-Gloss); 1.5 mils DFT. 3. 3rd Coat: Pro Industrial, Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, K46-150 Series (Semi-Gloss); 1.5 mils DFT.
Hart Design Group Painting and Coating Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 90 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 90 00 - Painting and Coating, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Interior Drywall Partitions at BSL-2 Lab – Eg-Shel Finish: 1. 1st Coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W02600; 1.4 mils DFT. 2. 2nd Coat: Pro Industrial, Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, K45-150 Series (Eg-Shel); 1.5 mils DFT. 3. 3rd Coat: Pro Industrial, Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, K45-150 Series (Eg-Shel); 1.5 mils DFT.
C. Interior Drywall Partitions at Open Office Areas (Rms. 42 & 47) / Quiet Room and Labs UNO: 1. 1st Coat: ProMar 400 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W04600; 1.1 mils DFT. 2. 2nd Coat: ProMar 400 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30W04651 Extra White; 1.2 mils DFT. 3. 3rd Coat: ProMar 400 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30W04651 Extra White; 1.2 mils DFT.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Painting and Coating Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 09 90 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\09 90 00 - Painting and Coating, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes interior signs.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 4. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years’ experience.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Package signs, labeled in name groups.
C. Store adhesive attachment tape at ambient room temperatures.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.
C. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Project warranty: Comply with requirements of Division 1.
B. Provide manufacturer’s standard one (1) year limited warranty covering manufacturing defects.
Hart Design Group Signage Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 10 14 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\10 14 00 - Signage.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
Manufacturer’s warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. 1. Warranty period: One (1) year from product ship date.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ASI, 3860 W. Northwest Highway, Suite 350, Dallas, TX 75220; (214) 352-9140, telephone (214) 352-9741 facsimile: (800) ASI-SPEC (274-7732). 2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
B. Acceptable Product: InTac™ ADA-Ready™ Sign System with requirements indicated for materials, thickness, finish colors, designs, shapes, sizes and details.
2.2 SIGN MATERIALS
A. Sign Face: Subsurface painted acrylic, .125-inch thick, matte first surface.
B. Applied lettering and / or numerals; LPP Series Individual, acrylic, dimensional characters, individual cut acrylic letters (1/32” thick) with matte finish.
C. Grade 2 braille; clear raster balls
D. Fastener: VHB tape - .030 inch thick double-face tape.
2.3 PLAQUE OPTIONS
A. Manufacturer’s standard ASI InTac™ tactile plaque construction. To meet requirements indicated for materials, thickness, finish colors designs, shapes, sizes and details of construction. Installed dimensional tolerances to be plus / minus 1/16 inch.
B. Surface graphics: Sign graphics to be applied to sign face by Manufacturer’s standard processes including Rowmark pressure sensitive adhesive. Face of sign graphics to be raised 1/32 inch min. from plaque first surface. Precisely formed, uniformly opaque graphics to comply with relevant ADA regulations and the requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position and colors.
C. Braille tags: clear raster balls to be drilled and tapped using ASI’s standard InTac™ procedure and InTac™ braille guide.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Colors: Closest match to “Cytiva Gray Tint 2” for signage background color, as selected from the Manufacturer’s standards.
Hart Design Group Signage Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 10 14 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\10 14 00 - Signage.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Surface texture: Matte, per ASI InTac™ standards.
2.5 INSTALLATION METHOD
A. System VT, vinyl tape
B. System SA, silicone adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate letters and graphic elements where indicated, using installation methods in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Cleaning and protection: Upon completion of the installation, clean letter surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
3.2 SIGN SCHEDULE
A. Schedule: Refer to Signage Schedule on Contract Drawings for Room Names and / or Room Numbers.
SEE NEXT PAGE
Hart Design Group Signage Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 10 14 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\10 14 00 - Signage.doc GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL SIGNS ARE SHOWN FULL-SIZE. SEE DIMENSIONED DRAWING, SHT. 1, FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. 5" 2. PROVIDE (1) SIGN PER ROOM, EXCEPT AS FOLLOWS: PROVIDE (2) SIGNS AT RM. 47. COLOR 3. BRAILLE SHOWN IS DIAGRAMMATIC; ALL BRAILLE 1 LEFT RIGHT 1 ACCENT 2" MARGIN MARGIN 2" SHALL BE TRANSLATED BY AN APPROVED STRIPE TRANSLATOR AND SHALL COMPLY WITH ADA 3 REQUIREMENTS. 16" 4. PROVIDE RAISED CHARACTERS FOR ROOM NUMBERS 7 ONLY, IN COMPLIANCE WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS 16" RAISED CHARACTER (TYPEFACE, CHARACTER PROPORTION, THICKNESS, TOP / BOT PRIVATE ROOM NUMBERS ETC.) REMAINDER OF TEXT / GRAPHICS SHALL BE SILK MARGIN SCREENED TO MATCH CYTIVA COLOR STANDARDS. OFFICE TYPICAL CHARACTER HEIGHT: 7/8", PROVIDE REDUCED REDUCED HEIGHT HEIGHT FOR ROOM SUFFIX AS OCCURS, 5/8" HIGH. RAISED CHARACTERS, ROOM NUMBER 5. SIGN CONSTRUCTION, MATERIAL, ATTACHMENT, ETC. 1 SUFFIX SHALL BE PER PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 8" 3" 6. COLOR ACCENT STRIPES SHALL BE PER CYTIVA COLOR STANDARDS / PANTONE CODES. 5" 7 5 8" 4242AA 8" 9 1 16" 05-05-2021 4" 3 " 1 INTERIOR SIGNAGE DIAGRAMS 64 #cebb 4" 7 FULL SIZE 8"Ø RAISED BRAILLE, DOMED 7 16"
1 2" SHEET 1 OF 5
PROJECT INDIGO 800 BTPK - SHREWSBURY GENERAL NOTES OPEN PRIVATE 1. ALL SIGNS ARE SHOWN FULL-SIZE. SEE DIMENSIONED DRAWING, SHT. 1, FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. OFFICE OFFICE 2. PROVIDE (1) SIGN PER ROOM, EXCEPT AS FOLLOWS: AREA PROVIDE (2) SIGNS AT RM. 47. 3. BRAILLE SHOWN IS DIAGRAMMATIC; ALL BRAILLE SHALL BE TRANSLATED BY AN APPROVED TRANSLATOR AND SHALL COMPLY WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS. 4. PROVIDE RAISED CHARACTERS FOR ROOM NUMBERS ONLY, IN COMPLIANCE WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS (TYPEFACE, CHARACTER PROPORTION, THICKNESS, 4242 4242AA ETC.) REMAINDER OF TEXT / GRAPHICS SHALL BE SILK SCREENED TO MATCH CYTIVA COLOR STANDARDS. TYPICAL CHARACTER HEIGHT: 7/8", PROVIDE REDUCED #Db #De;ea HEIGHT FOR ROOM SUFFIX AS OCCURS, 5/8" HIGH. 5. SIGN CONSTRUCTION, MATERIAL, ATTACHMENT, ETC. SHALL BE PER PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 6. COLOR ACCENT STRIPES SHALL BE PER CYTIVA COLOR STANDARDS / PANTONE CODES.
MECHANICAL / MAIN CELL ELECTRICAL CULTURE 05-05-2021 LAB INTERIOR SIGNAGE DIAGRAMS FULL SIZE 43 46 43 46 SHEET 2 OF 5 #Dc #Df PROJECT INDIGO 800 BTPK - SHREWSBURY GENERAL NOTES OPEN MEDIA 1. ALL SIGNS ARE SHOWN FULL-SIZE. SEE DIMENSIONED DRAWING, SHT. 1, FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. OFFICE PREP 2. PROVIDE (1) SIGN PER ROOM, EXCEPT AS FOLLOWS: LAB PROVIDE (2) SIGNS AT RM. 47. 3. BRAILLE SHOWN IS DIAGRAMMATIC; ALL BRAILLE SHALL BE TRANSLATED BY AN APPROVED TRANSLATOR AND SHALL COMPLY WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS. 4. PROVIDE RAISED CHARACTERS FOR ROOM NUMBERS ONLY, IN COMPLIANCE WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS (TYPEFACE, CHARACTER PROPORTION, THICKNESS, 4747 4949 ETC.) REMAINDER OF TEXT / GRAPHICS SHALL BE SILK SCREENED TO MATCH CYTIVA COLOR STANDARDS. TYPICAL CHARACTER HEIGHT: 7/8", PROVIDE REDUCED #gg #Di HEIGHT FOR ROOM SUFFIX AS OCCURS, 5/8" HIGH. 5. SIGN CONSTRUCTION, MATERIAL, ATTACHMENT, ETC. SHALL BE PER PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 6. COLOR ACCENT STRIPES SHALL BE PER CYTIVA COLOR STANDARDS / PANTONE CODES. NOTE: (2) EA. SIGNS REQ'D FOR ROOM 47.
QUIET MILLING ROOM LAB 05-05-2021 INTERIOR SIGNAGE DIAGRAMS FULL SIZE 51 52 51 52 SHEET 3 OF 5 #ea #eb PROJECT INDIGO 800 BTPK - SHREWSBURY GENERAL NOTES BIO-REACTOR MICROSCOPE 1. ALL SIGNS ARE SHOWN FULL-SIZE. SEE DIMENSIONED DRAWING, SHT. 1, FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. LAB ROOM 2. PROVIDE (1) SIGN PER ROOM, EXCEPT AS FOLLOWS: PROVIDE (2) SIGNS AT RM. 47. 3. BRAILLE SHOWN IS DIAGRAMMATIC; ALL BRAILLE SHALL BE TRANSLATED BY AN APPROVED TRANSLATOR AND SHALL COMPLY WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS. 4. PROVIDE RAISED CHARACTERS FOR ROOM NUMBERS ONLY, IN COMPLIANCE WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS (TYPEFACE, CHARACTER PROPORTION, THICKNESS, 5454 5555 ETC.) REMAINDER OF TEXT / GRAPHICS SHALL BE SILK SCREENED TO MATCH CYTIVA COLOR STANDARDS. TYPICAL CHARACTER HEIGHT: 7/8", PROVIDE REDUCED #eD #ee HEIGHT FOR ROOM SUFFIX AS OCCURS, 5/8" HIGH. 5. SIGN CONSTRUCTION, MATERIAL, ATTACHMENT, ETC. SHALL BE PER PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 6. COLOR ACCENT STRIPES SHALL BE PER CYTIVA COLOR STANDARDS / PANTONE CODES.
BSL-2 COLD LAB ROOM 05-05-2021 INTERIOR SIGNAGE DIAGRAMS FULL SIZE 57 61 57 61 SHEET 4 OF 5 #eg #fa PROJECT INDIGO 800 BTPK - SHREWSBURY GENERAL NOTES CRYOGENIC ASSAY LAB 1. ALL SIGNS ARE SHOWN FULL-SIZE. SEE DIMENSIONED DRAWING, SHT. 1, FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. STORAGE 2. PROVIDE (1) SIGN PER ROOM, EXCEPT AS FOLLOWS: PROVIDE (2) SIGNS AT RM. 47. 3. BRAILLE SHOWN IS DIAGRAMMATIC; ALL BRAILLE SHALL BE TRANSLATED BY AN APPROVED TRANSLATOR AND SHALL COMPLY WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS. 4. PROVIDE RAISED CHARACTERS FOR ROOM NUMBERS ONLY, IN COMPLIANCE WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS (TYPEFACE, CHARACTER PROPORTION, THICKNESS, 6363 6464 ETC.) REMAINDER OF TEXT / GRAPHICS SHALL BE SILK SCREENED TO MATCH CYTIVA COLOR STANDARDS. TYPICAL CHARACTER HEIGHT: 7/8", PROVIDE REDUCED #fc #fe HEIGHT FOR ROOM SUFFIX AS OCCURS, 5/8" HIGH. 5. SIGN CONSTRUCTION, MATERIAL, ATTACHMENT, ETC. SHALL BE PER PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 6. COLOR ACCENT STRIPES SHALL BE PER CYTIVA COLOR STANDARDS / PANTONE CODES.
AUTOCLAVE CYLINDER STORAGE 05-05-2021 INTERIOR SIGNAGE DIAGRAMS FULL SIZE
65 65AA 65 65 SHEET 5 OF 5 #fe #fe;ea PROJECT INDIGO 800 BTPK - SHREWSBURY R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Signage Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 10 14 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\10 14 00 - Signage.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 10 26 13 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section describes wall and corner guards and their installation complete as specified and as shown in the Contract Drawings. 1. Corner guards. 2. Fasteners and retainers. 3. Top, bottom corner members, end pieces.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 4. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Substrate for wall and corner guards.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. 2. ASTM D1308 – Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. 3. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. ASTM F476 – Test Methods for Security of Swinging Door Assemblies.
B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit physical dimensions, features, wall mounting brackets with mounted measurements, anchorage details, and rough-in measurements.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and color selection charts.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ADA requirements for physically handicapped.
Hart Design Group Wall and Corner Guards Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 10 26 13 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\10 26 13 - Wall and Corner Guards, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the project site in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to show the manufacturer.
B. Store material in original, undamaged packaging in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight and exposure to the elements. A minimum room temperature of 40F and a maximum of 100F should be maintained.
C. Materials must be stored flat.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Materials must be acclimated in an environment of 65 to 75F for at least 24 hours prior to beginning of the installation.
B. Installation areas must be enclosed and weatherproofed before installation commences.
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with wall or partition sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Construction Specialties Inc. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Corner Guards: Surface-mounted with construction adhesive; L-shaped stainless steel units, with 3-½ x 3-½ inch standard legs; Construction Specialties Model CO-8 adhesive mounted or approved equal. Corner guards shall have the following characteristics: 1. Material to be 16 gage, Type 304 stainless steel with a #4 satin finish. 2. Projection from wall to outside of guard (leg dimension): 3 ½ inches. 3. Length: 4’-0” high. 4. Provide corner guards with 90 deg. corners as shown in Contract Drawings. 5. Deliver corner guards with strippable paper protective covering 6. The manufacturer shall supply all necessary fasteners.
Hart Design Group Wall and Corner Guards Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 10 26 13 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\10 26 13 - Wall and Corner Guards, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.
B. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify rough in for components are correctly sized and located.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt, debris and loose particles. Perform additional preparation procedures as required by the manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Take all necessary steps to prevent damage to the materials during installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, using only approved mounting hardware, and locating all components firmly into position, level and plumb.
B. Position corner guard 4 inches above finished floor. Corner guards shall be 4 feet in height.
C. Install stainless steel corner guards using waterproof mastic approved/recommended by the corner guard manufacturer.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately upon completion of installation, clean material in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended cleaning method.
B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as work progresses and upon completion of the work.
C. Protect newly installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains.
Hart Design Group Wall and Corner Guards Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 10 26 13 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\10 26 13 - Wall and Corner Guards, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.6 SCHEDULES
A. See Contract Drawings for extent and locations of corner guards.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Wall and Corner Guards Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 10 26 13 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\10 26 13 - Wall and Corner Guards, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 April 16, 2015 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B Rev. 0
SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire extinguishers and fire extinguisher cabinets.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 4. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements 5. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 6. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Fire Protection Equipment Directory.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to all applicable codes.
B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for purpose specified and indicated.
C. Provide fire extinguisher cabinets classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for purpose specified and indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 30 00 – Product Requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets, location, and fire ratings.
C. Product Data: Submit extinguisher operational features, color, and finish.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
Hart Design Group Fire Protection Specialties Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 10 44 00 - 1 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialties, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 April 16, 2015 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B Rev. 0
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures are capable of freezing extinguisher ingredients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co. Model MP-10, Multi-Purpose (4 each). Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. MP Series- Multi Purpose Dry Chemical Type: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage; used for Class A, B, and C fires.
B. Extinguisher Finish: Impact resistant polyester/epoxy paint finish.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co., Inc., Occult Series, Model O-2409-6R Full Panel (4 each). 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, maximum 48 inches from finished floor to top of extinguisher handle.
B. Secure rigidly in place.
Hart Design Group Fire Protection Specialties Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 10 44 00 - 2 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialties, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 April 16, 2015 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B Rev. 0
C. Place extinguishers in cabinets.
D. Position cabinet signage.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Fire Protection Specialties Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 10 44 00 - 3 HH:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialties, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 12 36 00 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Standard and custom metal laboratory casework. 2. Utility-space framing at backs of base cabinets and between backs of base cabinets. 3. Utility-space closure panels between base cabinets and at exposed end of utility spaces. 4. Laboratory countertops. 5. Accessories
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For metal laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for installing laboratory casework. 2. Include details of utility spaces showing supports for conduits and piping. 3. Include details of exposed conduits, if required, for service fittings. 4. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, and other laboratory equipment. 5. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other Sections.
C. Sample for Verification: For each type of finish, including countertop material, in manufacturer’s standard sizes.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory casework, including countertops, service fittings, and accessories, through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Standard: Comply with SEFA 8, "Laboratory Furniture-Casework, Shelving and Tables-Recommended Practices."
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or other suitable material.
Hart Design Group Metal Laboratory Casework Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 12 36 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\12 36 00 - Metal Laboratory Casework, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install metal laboratory casework until wet work and utility rough-in are complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of metal laboratory casework.
B. Coordinate installation of metal laboratory casework with installation of fume hoods and other laboratory equipment.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of metal laboratory casework provided. Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged laboratory casework finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Mott Manufacturing, Ltd.; Laboratory casework, Manchester Series.
B. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements.
2.2 CABINET MATERIALS
A. Metal: Cold-rolled commercial steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Minimum Metal Thickness: 1. Sides, Ends, Fixed Backs, Bottoms, Tops, Soffits, and Items Not Otherwise Indicated: 0.0428 inch. Except for flammable liquid-storage cabinets, bottoms may be 0.0329 inch if reinforced. 2. Back Panels, Doors, Drawer Fronts and Bodies, and Shelves: 0.0329 inch except 0.0428 inch for back panels and doors of flammable liquid-storage cabinets and for unreinforced shelves more than 36 inches long. 3. Intermediate Horizontal Rails, Table Aprons and Cross Rails, Center Posts, and Top Gussets: 0.0528 inch. 4. Drawer Runners, Sink Supports, and Hinge Reinforcements: 0.0677 inch. 5. Leveling and Corner Gussets: 0.0966 inch.
Hart Design Group Metal Laboratory Casework Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 12 36 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\12 36 00 - Metal Laboratory Casework, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.3 CABINET FABRICATION
A. General: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly on precision jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and channels. Integrally frame and weld to form a dirt and vermin-resistant enclosure. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for sink support. Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32 inch.
B. Hinged Doors: Mortise for hinges and reinforce with angles welded inside inner pans at hinge edge.
C. Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with no raw metal edges at top. Sides, back, and bottom fabricated in one piece with rolled or formed top of sides for stiffening and comfortable grasp for drawer removal. Weld drawer front to sides and bottom to form a single, integral unit. Provide drawers with rubber bumpers, ball-bearing slides, and positive stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact or accidental removal.
D. Adjustable Shelves: Front, back, and ends formed down, with edges returned horizontally at front and back to form reinforcing channels.
E. Utilities: Provide space, cutouts, and holes for pipes, conduits, and fittings in cabinet bodies to accommodate utility services and their support-strut assemblies.
F. Utility-Space Framing: Laboratory casework manufacturer’s standard steel framing units consisting of 2 steel slotted channels complying with MFMA-2, not less than 1-5/8 inches square by 0.0966 inch thick, and connected together at top and bottom by U-shaped brackets made from 1-1/4-by-1/4-inch steel flat bars. Framing units may be made by welding specified channel material into rectangular frames instead of using U-shaped brackets.
G. Closure and Filler Strips and Utility-Space Closure Panels: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets and with hemmed or flanged edges.
2.4 METAL CABINET FINISH
A. Preparation: After assembly, clean surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.
B. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pre-treating, apply laboratory casework manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's
Hart Design Group Metal Laboratory Casework Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 12 36 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\12 36 00 - Metal Laboratory Casework, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8. Acceptance level for chemical spot test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.
2.5 CABINET HARDWARE
A. General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's standard satin-finish, commercial- quality, heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type.
B. Hinges: Stainless steel, 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide 2 for doors 48 inches or less in height and 3 for doors more than 48 inches in height.
C. Pulls: Stainless steel fastened from back with two screws.
D. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catch or dual, self-aligning, permanent magnet catch. Provide 2 catches on doors more than 48 inches in height.
E. Drawer Slides: Powder-coated, full-extension, self-closing, heavy-duty drawer slides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05091, and rated for 150 lbf.
F. Label Holders: Stainless steel, aluminum, or chrome plated; sized to receive standard label cards approximately 1 by 2 inches, attached with screws or rivets. Provide where indicated.
G. Locks: Cam or half-mortise type with 5-pin tumbler, brass with chrome-plated finish; complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07261, E07111, or E07021. 1. Provide minimum of 4 keys per lock and two master keys. 2. Key all locks within a single laboratory space alike, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide where indicated.
2.6 COUNTERTOPS
A. Countertops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of defects. Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch, unless noted otherwise, with continuous drip groove on underside 1/2 inch from edge.
B. Phenolic Countertops U.N.O. throughout: Basis of Design is by Durcon, Inc., Taylor TX. 76574. Chemical Resistant SPC (solid phenolic compact) self-supporting flat panel based on thermosetting resins, homogeneously reinforced with cellulose fibers and manufactured under high pressure. Panels have a pigmented resin core with a decorative surface that is electron beam cured.
Hart Design Group Metal Laboratory Casework Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 12 36 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\12 36 00 - Metal Laboratory Casework, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. Color: Gray, submit sample to Architect/Engineer for approval. 2. Countertop Fabrication: Shop fabricate in longest practical lengths. Butt join with bonded epoxy grout. a. Countertop Configuration: Flat, 1-inch thick, with chamfered edge and corners, and drip groove and integral coved backsplash. b. Countertop Construction: Uniform throughout full thickness with standard edge. c. Back splash configuration: 1-inch-thick by 4-inch-high applied curbs.
C. Epoxy Countertops at Sink Base locations only: Basis of Design is by Durcon, Inc., Taylor TX. 76574. Solid Epoxy Resin sheets cast from modified epoxy resin and non- asbestos inert fillers, compounded mixture cured and thermoset specifically from formulation to provide exceptional physical and chemical resistance in medium to heavy- duty lab environments.
1. Color: Gray, submit sample to Architect/Engineer for approval. 2. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and prefitted, concealed metal splines. a. Countertop Configuration: Flat, 1-inch thick, with marine edge and integral coved backsplash. b. Countertop Construction: Uniform throughout full thickness with standard edge. c. Back splash configuration: 1-inch-thick by 4-inch-high applied curbs.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Custom components and enclosures: Provide as indicated, fabricated from same material as casework, and as follows:
B. Materials: Fabricated from cast or forged red brass, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Reagent-Grade Water Service Fittings: Polypropylene, PVC, or PVDF for parts in contact with water.
C. Finish: Chromium plated. 1. Provide corrosion-resistant finish in laboratory casework in color as approved by Architect from manufacturer’s full color range.
D. Hand of Fittings: Furnish right-handed fittings unless otherwise indicated.
E. Handles: Provide three- or four-arm, forged brass handles for valves, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide knurled nylon handles for needle valves.
F. Service-Outlet Identification: Provide color-coded plastic discs with embossed identification, secured to each service-fitting handle to be tamper resistant.
G. Electrical Fittings: Power receptacles and voice/data receptacles configurations as indicated on electrical drawings.
Hart Design Group Metal Laboratory Casework Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 12 36 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\12 36 00 - Metal Laboratory Casework, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of metal laboratory casework. 1. Proceed with installation after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS
A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B. Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with two fasteners at each frame. Fasten to partition framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements in partitions and to base cabinets. C. Base Cabinets: Adjust top rails and subtops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to utility-space framing, partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced not more than 24 inches on center; bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. 1. Where base cabinets are installed away from walls, fasten to floor at toe space at not more than 24 inches on center and at sides of cabinets with not less than 2 fasteners per side.
D. Wall Cabinets: Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 24 inches on center; align similar adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.
E. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.
F. Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS
A. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush hairline joints and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Locate joints only where shown on Shop Drawings.
B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be
Hart Design Group Metal Laboratory Casework Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 12 36 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\12 36 00 - Metal Laboratory Casework, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800 BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
joined in shop.
C. Fastening: 1. Secure countertops, except for epoxy countertops, to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back. 2. Secure epoxy countertops to cabinets with epoxy cement, applied at each corner and along perimeter edges at not more than 48 inches on center 3. Where necessary to penetrate countertops with fasteners, countersink heads approximately 1/8 inch and plug hole flush with material equal to countertop in chemical resistance, hardness, and appearance.
D. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of countertop, curb, and splash, with walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Match materials and finish to adjacent laboratory casework. Use chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where recommended by manufacturer.
E. Provide required holes and cutouts for service fittings. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Install accessories according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports/shelving systems and pegboards to partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Comply with requirements in Mechanical and Electrical specification sections for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings, piping, electrical devices, and wiring.
B. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer’s written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink- and countertop-mounted fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or countertop material. Securely anchor fittings, piping, and conduit to laboratory casework, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil plastic or other suitable water- resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at minimum of 48 inches on center.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Metal Laboratory Casework Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 12 36 00 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Arch\12 36 00 - Metal Laboratory Casework, Rev 0.doc R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 05 03
EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes electrical connections to equipment.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Submittal procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment connections.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
B. Determine connection locations and requirements.
C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment.
D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.
Hart Design Group Equipment Wiring Connections Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 03 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CORD AND PLUGS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Schneider Electric. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1.
C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet furnished for equipment.
D. Cord Construction: Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
E. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned equipment wiring connections, including abandoned connections above accessible ceiling finishes.
B. Disconnect abandoned utilization equipment and remove wiring connections. Remove abandoned components when connected raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes and enclosures not removed.
C. Extend existing equipment connections using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Make electrical connections.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered.
D. Install receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
Hart Design Group Equipment Wiring Connections Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 03 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
E. Install cord and cap for field-supplied attachment plug.
F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.
G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements.
H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and configurations.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Equipment Wiring Connections Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 03 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes building wire and cable; nonmetallic-sheathed cable; direct burial cable; service entrance cable; armored cable; metal clad cable; and wiring connectors and connections.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Product requirements for wire identification. 2. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching: Execution requirements for trenching required by this section. 3. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Requirements for backfill to be placed by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: 1. UL 1277 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows: 1. Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 3. Conductor not smaller than 12AWG for power and lighting circuits. 4. Conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. 5. Increase wire size in branch circuits to limit voltage drop to a maximum of 3 percent.
B. Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods: 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway, or metal clad cable. 2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway, or metal clad cable.
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 19 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only Type THWN in raceway. 5. Exterior Locations: Use only Type XHHW insulation, in raceway. 6. Underground Locations: Use only Type XHHW insulation, in raceway. 7. Cable Tray Locations: Use only Tray cable Type TC.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL".
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit for building wire and each cable assembly type.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5, average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m) when tested in accordance with NFPA 262.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and lengths required.
B. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 19 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire or General Cable. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
C. Conductor: Copper.
D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
E. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
F. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
2.2 ARMORED CABLE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire, Okonite, General Cable. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
E. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
F. Armor Material: Steel.
G. Armor Design: Corrugated tube.
2.3 METAL CLAD CABLE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire, Okonite, General Cable. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 19 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
E. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic
F. Armor Material: Steel.
G. Armor Design: Corrugated tube.
H. Jacket: Where required.
2.4 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Split Bolt Connectors: 1. Manufacturers: a. Thomas & Betts, Burndy. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Solderless Pressure Connectors: 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M, Ideal Industries. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C. Spring Wire Connectors: 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M, Nelco, Inc.. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
D. Compression Connectors: 1. Manufacturers: a. Thomas & Betts, Ideal, Burndy.. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.5 TERMINATIONS
A. Terminal Lugs for Wires 6 AWG and Smaller: Solderless, compression type copper.
B. Lugs for Wires 4 AWG and Larger: Color keyed, compression type copper, with insulating sealing collars.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 19 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.3 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned wire and cable, including abandoned wire and cable above accessible ceiling finishes. Patch surfaces where removed cables pass through building finishes.
B. Disconnect abandoned circuits and remove circuit wire and cable. Remove abandoned boxes when wire and cable servicing boxes is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes not removed.
C. Provide access to existing wiring connections remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or install access panel.
D. Extend existing circuits using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.
E. Clean and repair existing wire and cable remaining or wire and cable to be reinstalled.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions.
B. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
C. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
D. Special Techniques--Building Wire in Raceway: 1. Pull conductors into raceway at same time. 2. Install building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment.
E. Special Techniques - Cable: 1. Protect exposed cable from damage. 2. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. 3. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
F. Special Techniques - Direct Burial Cable: 1. Trench and backfill for direct burial cable installation. Refer to Section 31 23 23 and Section 31 23 17. Install warning tape along entire length of direct burial cable, within 3 inches of grade. 2. Use suitable direct burial cable fittings and connectors.
G. Special Techniques - Wiring Connections: 1. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 19 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. 4. Install split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. 5. Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. 6. Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
H. Install stranded conductors for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. Install crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under screws.
I. Install terminal lugs on ends of 600 volt wires unless lugs are furnished on connected device, such as circuit breakers.
J. Size lugs in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations terminating wire sizes. Install 2- hole type lugs to connect wires 4 AWG and larger to copper bus bars.
K. For terminal lugs fastened together such as on motors, transformers, and other apparatus, or when space between studs is small enough that lugs can turn and touch each other, insulate for dielectric strength of 2-1/2 times normal potential of circuit.
3.5 WIRE COLOR
A. General: 1. For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller, install wire colors in accordance with the following: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. c. Orange, brown, and yellow for circuits at 277/480 volts single or three phase. 2. For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger, identify wire with colored tape at terminals, splices and boxes. Colors are as follows: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. c. Orange, brown, and yellow for circuits at 277/480 volts single or three phase.
B. Neutral Conductors: White. When two or more neutrals are located in one conduit, individually identify each with proper circuit number.
C. Branch Circuit Conductors: Install three or four wire home runs with each phase uniquely color coded.
D. Feeder Circuit Conductors: Uniquely color code each phase.
E. Ground Conductors: 1. For 6 AWG and smaller: Green. 2. For 4 AWG and larger: Identify with green tape at both ends and visible points including junction boxes.
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 19 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 19 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Rod electrodes. 2. Active electrodes. 3. Wire. 4. Grounding well components. 5. Mechanical connectors. 6. Exothermic connections.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing: Bonding or welding bars when reinforcing steel is used for electrodes. 2. Section 09 69 00 - Access Flooring: Grounding systems for access flooring. 3. Section 26 41 00 - Facility Lightning Protection: Grounding of lightning protection system. 4. Section 33 79 00 - Site Grounding: Site related grounding components for buildings and facilities.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.
B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes: 1. Existing Metal underground water pipe. 2. Metal building frame. 3. Concrete-encased electrode.
Hart Design Group Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 26 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
4. Ground ring specified in Section 33 79 00. 5. Rod electrode. 6. Plate electrode.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections.
C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142, and UL labeled.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section approved by manufacturer.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.
C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.
Hart Design Group Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 26 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ROD ELECTRODES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Harger Lightning and Grounding, Burndy. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
B. Product Description: 1. Material: Copper. 2. Diameter: 3/4 inch. 3. Length: 10 feet.
C. Connector: Connector for exothermic welded connection.
2.2 WIRE
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Foundation Electrodes: 4/0 AWG.
C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper conductor bare.
D. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor bare.
2.3 GROUNDING WELL COMPONENTS
A. Well Pipe: 8 inches NPS by 24 inches long concrete pipe with belled end.
B. Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover.
2.4 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Harger Lightning and Grounding, Burndy. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
B. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation.
Hart Design Group Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 26 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.5 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Harger Lightning and Grounding, Burndy. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and making permanent field connections between grounding system components.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove paint, rust, mill oils, surface contaminants at connection points.
3.3 EXISTING WORK
A. Modify existing grounding system to maintain continuity to accommodate renovations.
B. Extend existing grounding system using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installation.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with IEEE 142.
B. Install rod electrodes at locations as indicated on Drawings.
C. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.
D. Install grounding well pipe with cover at rod locations as indicated on Drawings. Install well pipe top flush with finished grade.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
C. Perform continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
Hart Design Group Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 26 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 26 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Spring steel clips. 4. Sleeves. 5. Mechanical sleeve seals. 6. Firestopping relating to electrical work. 7. Firestopping accessories. 8. Equipment bases and supports.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Product requirements for concrete for placement by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
B. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.
C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 29 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.DOC
R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Firestopping Materials: UL 263, UL 1479, to achieve fire ratings of adjacent construction.
B. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Firestopping: Conform to UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.
C. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.
E. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of hangers and supports.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
H. Firestopping Engineering Judgments: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgments by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. 1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 29 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.DOC
R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2. Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required.
B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion. 1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories. 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.
C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed.
D. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly.
E. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
F. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.
C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 29 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.DOC
R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon, Thomas & Betts, or Unistrut. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads.
C. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel.
D. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten.
E. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits.
F. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F. Self locking.
2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line, or Unistrut. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.
2.3 SPRING STEEL CLIPS
A. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line, Minerallac Company. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Mounting hole and screw closure.
2.4 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for raceway through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for raceway through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 29 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.DOC
R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Sleeves for raceway through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
D. Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
2.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Manufacturers: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products, Hilti, Inc., STI Firestop. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Multiple component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.
2.6 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.
B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. 4. Plywood or particle board. 5. Alumina silicate fire board.
C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.
D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.
E. Non-Rated Surfaces:
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 29 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.DOC
R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C. Install damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
D. Obtain permission from Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E. Obtain permission from Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts, or expansion anchors. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring steel clips, steel ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws.
B. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 29 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.DOC
R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
C. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC.
D. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
E. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.
F. Supports: 1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. 2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. 4. Support vertical conduit at every other floor.
3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING
A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.
B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating.
D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size.
E. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.
F. Fire Rated Surface: 1. Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. c. Pack void with backing material. d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. 2. Where cable tray, bus, cable bus, conduit, wireway, or trough penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition, floor, ceiling, and roof opening as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 29 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.DOC
R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling. 3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical seal to size of conduit and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at laboratories, telecommunication rooms and data rooms. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit.
3.5 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment.
B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct supports of formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
3.6 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES
A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links.
B. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam.
C. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
E. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
F. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
G. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 29 - 8 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.DOC
R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.8 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 29 - 9 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.DOC
R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and hand holes.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections. 2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 34 - Floor Boxes for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems. 6. Section 26 05 39 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems. 7. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 8. Section 26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures. 9. Section 26 27 23 - Indoor Service Poles. 10. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. 11. Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems. 12. Section 27 05 36 - Cable Trays for Communications Systems. 13. Section 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC).
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 5. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 6. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
Hart Design Group Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 33 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system.
B. Underground More than 5 feet outside Foundation Wall: Provide concrete encased thin-wall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast metal boxes or nonmetallic handhole.
C. Underground within 5 feet from Foundation Wall: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic boxes.
D. In or Under Slab on Grade: Provide thin-wall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast or nonmetallic metal boxes.
E. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid steel. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
F. In Slab Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide sheet metal boxes.
G. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
H. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
I. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit for the following: 1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Nonmetallic conduit. 4. Flexible nonmetallic conduit. 5. Nonmetallic tubing. 6. Raceway fittings. 7. Conduit bodies. 8. Surface raceway. 9. Wireway.
Hart Design Group Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 33 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
10. Pull and junction boxes. 11. Handholes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inch. 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 05 03.
B. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Thomas & Betts Corporation, Wheatland Tube Company, or Western Tube and Conduit. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
D. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
Hart Design Group Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 33 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.2 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire, AFC Cable Systems. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.3 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire, AFC Cable Systems, Carlon. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers: 1. Wheatland Tube Company, Carlon. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel compression type.
2.5 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon, EGS/Appleton Electric. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
2.6 NONMETALLIC TUBING
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: NEMA TC 2.
Hart Design Group Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 33 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
2.7 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold, Panduit Corp.. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway.
C. Size: As indicated on drawings.
D. Finish: Gray enamel.
E. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match finish on raceway.
2.8 WIREWAY
A. Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold, Schneider Electric, Carlon. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: General purpose type wireway.
C. Knockouts: Manufacturer's standard.
D. Cover: Screw cover with full gaskets.
E. Connector: Flanged.
F. Fittings: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws.
G. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish.
2.9 OUTLET BOXES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell, Emerson Electric Co., and Carlon. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
C. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
Hart Design Group Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 33 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer.
E. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26.
F. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover.
2.10 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell, Hoffman. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
C. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 27 16.
D. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4X; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
E. In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Smooth cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC".
F. Fiberglass Handholes: Die-molded, glass-fiber hand holes: 1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 inch x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side. 2. Cover: Glass-fiber, weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
B. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.
C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.
Hart Design Group Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 33 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
E. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.
F. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
3.4 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY
A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system.
B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29.
E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports
F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29.
H. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.
I. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
K. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade: 3/4 inch. Do not cross conduits in slab.
L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.
Hart Design Group Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 33 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.
N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
P. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.
Q. Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.
R. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
S. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
T. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses control and expansion joints.
U. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.
V. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
W. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
X. Close ends and unused openings in wireway.
3.5 INSTALLATION - BOXES
A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings.
B. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.
C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26.
D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
Hart Design Group Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 33 - 8 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
F. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches separation. Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
I. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
M. Support boxes independently of conduit.
N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
O. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
3.6 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 07 84 00.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket..
C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings.
D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
Hart Design Group Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 33 - 9 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 33 - 10 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Conduit markers. 5. Stencils. 6. Underground Warning Tape. 7. Lockout Devices.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 2. Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems. 3. Section 28 05 53 - Identification for Electronic Safety and Security.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required. 2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
Hart Design Group Identification for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 53 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years of experience.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.
C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.
D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Install labels only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting background color.
C. Letter Size: 1. 1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4 inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
D. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch.
2.2 LABELS
A. Manufacturers:
Hart Design Group Identification for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 53 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. Seton, Brady ID. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background.
2.3 WIRE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Ideal, Brady ID. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: tubing type wire markers.
C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on shop drawings.
2.4 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton, Brady ID. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: Labels fastened with adhesive.
C. Color: 1. Medium Voltage System: Black lettering on white background. 2. 480 Volt System: Black lettering on white background. 3. 208 Volt System: Black lettering on white background.
D. Legend: 1. 480 Volt System: 480 VOLTS. HIGH VOLTAGE. 2. 208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS.
2.5 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton, Brady ID. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
Hart Design Group Identification for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 53 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Install identification on existing equipment to remain in accordance with this section.
B. Install identification on unmarked existing equipment.
C. Replace lost nameplates and labels.
D. Re-stencil existing equipment.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.
B. Nameplate Installation: 1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive. 5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations. 6. Install nameplates for the following: a. Switchboards. b. Panelboards. c. Transformers. d. Service Disconnects.
C. Label Installation: 1. Install label parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations. 3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
D. Wire Marker Installation: 1. Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. 2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run. 3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation as indicated on Drawings.
Hart Design Group Identification for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 53 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
E. Conduit Marker Installation: 1. Install conduit marker for each conduit longer than 6 feet. 2. Conduit Marker Spacing: 20 feet on center.
F. Stencil Installation: 1. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.
G. Underground Warning Tape Installation: 1. Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Identification for Electrical Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 05 53 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 09 23
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Remote control lighting relays. 2. Lighting contactors. 3. Switches. 4. Switch plates. 5. Occupancy sensors. 6. Photocells. 7. Photocell control unit.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this section. 2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems: Product requirements for raceway and boxes for placement by this section. 4. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Product requirements for electrical identification items for placement by this section. 5. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards. 6. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Product requirements for wiring devices for placement by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 3. NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks. 4. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 5. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures. 6. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Distributed switching control using self-contained individually mounted lighting relays.
Hart Design Group Lighting Controls Devices Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 09 23 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioned drawings of lighting control system components and accessories. 1. One Line Diagram: Indicating system configuration indicating panels, number and type of switches or devices. 2. Include typical wiring diagrams for each component.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s standard product data for each system component.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for each system component.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record the following information: 1. Actual locations of components and record circuiting and switching arrangements. 2. Wiring diagrams reflecting field installed conditions with identified and numbered, system components and devices.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit replacement parts numbers. 2. Submit manufacturer’s published installation instructions and operating instructions. 3. Recommended renewal parts list.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept components on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect components by storing in manufacturer’s containers indoor protected from weather.
Hart Design Group Lighting Controls Devices Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 09 23 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for components.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.
B. Furnish two of each switch type.
C. Furnish two of each occupancy sensor type.
D. Furnish two of each photocell type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REMOTE CONTROL LIGHTING RELAYS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Lithonia, Philips. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Heavy duty, single-coil momentary contact mechanically held remote control relays.
C. Contacts: Rated 20 amperes at 277 volts. Rated for lighting applications with fluorescent and LED lamps.
D. Line Voltage Connections: Clamp type screw terminals.
E. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard enamel or aluminum. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. 3. Hazardous Locations: Class I Division 2.
2.2 SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell, Leviton, or Pass & Seymour. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Wall Switch: Industrial Grade non-pilot light toggle switches for overriding relays. 1. Color: Ivory.
Hart Design Group Lighting Controls Devices Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 09 23 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Key Switch: Spade key type. Match non-key switch ratings.
2.3 SWITCH PLATES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton, Pass and Seymour. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Specification Grade. 1. Material: Plastic. 2. Color: Ivory.
2.4 OCCUPANCY SENSOR
A. Manufacturers: 1. Lithonia, Philips. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Compatible with modular relay panels. Capable of being wired directly to Class 2 wiring without auxiliary components or devices.
C. Separate sensitivity and time delay adjustments with LED indication of sensed movement. User adjustable time-delay: 30 seconds to 12 minutes.
D. Furnish with manual override.
E. Operation: Silent.
F. Room Sensors: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Corridor and Hallway Sensors: 1. Capable of detecting motion 14 feet wide and 80 feet long with one sensor mounted 10 feet above floor. 2. Capable of detecting motion in warehouse aisle 10 feet wide and 60 feet long or 100 feet long when mounted 22 feet above floor. 3. Capable of being wired in master-slave configuration to extend area of coverage.
2.5 PHOTOCELLS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Philips, Wattstopper. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
B. General: Consist of sensor mounted as indicated on Drawings with separate control-calibration module. Sensor connected to control-calibration module via single shielded conductor with maximum distance of 500 feet. Control unit powered by 24 VAC.
C. Control-Calibration Module: Furnish with the following:
Hart Design Group Lighting Controls Devices Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 09 23 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. Capable of being switched between 4 measurement ranges. 2. Separate trip points for high and low response settings. 3. Momentary contact device to override photocell relays. 4. Three minute time delay between switching outputs to avoid nuisance tripping.
D. Sensor Devices: Each sensor employs photo diode technology to allow linear response to daylight within illuminance range. 1. Exterior Lighting: Hooded sensor, horizontally mounted, employing flat lens, and working range 10-100 footcandles in 10 percent increments. Entire sensor encased in optically clear epoxy resin. 2. Indoor Lighting: Sensor with Fresnel lens providing for 60 degree cone shaped response area to monitor indoor office lighting levels. 3. Atriums: Sensor with translucent dome with 180 degree field of view and respond in range of 100-1,000 footcandles. 4. Skylights: Sensor with translucent dome with 180 degree field of view and respond in range of 1,000-10,000 footcandles.
2.6 PHOTOCELL CONTROL UNIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Wattstopper. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Photodiode control unit with PHOTOCELL ENABLE and MASTER OVERRIDE inputs for remote control, 3 minute time delay, and with selectable ranges for 10-100 footcandle.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount switches, occupancy sensors, and photocells as indicated on Drawings.
B. Install wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 19.
C. Use only properly color coded, stranded wire. Install wire sizes as indicated on Drawings. Install wire in conduit in accordance with Section 26 05 33.
D. Label each low voltage wire clearly indicating connecting relay panel. Refer to Section 26 05 53.
E. Mount relay as indicated on Drawings. Wire numbered relays in panel to control power to each load. Install relays to be accessible. Allow space around relays for ventilation and circulation of air.
F. Identify power wiring with circuit breaker number controlling load. When multiple circuit breaker panels are feeding into relay panel, label wires to indicate originating panel designation.
Hart Design Group Lighting Controls Devices Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 09 23 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
G. Label each low voltage wire with relay number at each switch or sensor.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer’s field services.
B. Furnish services for minimum of one day for check, test, and start-up. Perform the following services: 1. Check installation of panelboards. 2. Test operation of remote controlled devices. 3. Repair or replace defective components.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting.
B. Test each system component after installation to verify proper operation.
C. Test relays, contactors, and switches after installation to confirm proper operation.
D. Confirm correct loads are recorded on directory card in each panel.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.
B. Demonstrate operation of the following system components: 1. Operation of switches. 2. Operation of each type of occupancy sensors. 3. Operation of each type of photocell.
C. Furnish 4 hours to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7 days notice to Engineer of training date.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Lighting Controls Devices Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 09 23 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 22 00
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Two-winding transformers. 2. Shielded transformers. 3. Autotransformers. 4. Buck-and-boost transformers.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Housekeeping pads. 2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 6. Section 26 22 03 - Low-Voltage Transformers For Nonlinear Loads. 7. Section 26 22 06 - Low-Voltage Transformer Load Centers.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA ST 1 - Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose Type). 2. NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications.
B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, tap configurations, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.
C. Test and Evaluation Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load, and sound level.
D. Source Quality Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections.
E. Field Quality Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor furnished tests and inspections.
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Transformers Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 22 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 22 00 - Low-Voltage Transformers.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Record Documentation: Record actual locations of transformers.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton, Schneider Electric, Cutler Hammer. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry type transformers, ratings as indicated on Drawings.
C. Operation: 1. Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase. 2. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase. 3. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows: 4. 1-15 kVA: Class 185 with 80 degrees C rise. 5. 16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 80 degrees C rise. 6. Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point at full load. 7. Winding Taps: a. Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps on primary winding. b. Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20. 8. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. 9. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for transformers 300 kVA and larger.
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Transformers Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 22 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 22 00 - Low-Voltage Transformers.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
10. Mounting: a. 1-15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting. b. 16-75 kVA: Suitable for wall, or floor mounting. c. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.
D. Materials: 1. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible flexible copper grounding strap. 2. Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded. 3. Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1 ventilated. Furnish lifting eyes or brackets.
E. Fabrication: 1. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts. 2. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated allowable temperature rise.
2.2 SHIELDED TRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton, Schneider Electric, Cutler Hammer. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry type shielded isolation transformers, ratings as indicated on Drawings.
C. Operation: Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase. 1. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase. 2. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows: a. 10-15 kVA: Class 185 with 115 degrees C rise. b. 16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 150 degrees C rise. 3. Case temperature: Do not exceed 50 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point at full load. 4. Winding Taps: a. Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps on primary winding. b. Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20. 5. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. 6. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for transformers 300 kVA and larger. 7. Winding Shield: Electrostatic, with separate insulated grounding connection. 8. Mounting: a. 1-15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting. b. 16-75 kVA: Suitable for wall, or floor mounting. c. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.
D. Materials:
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Transformers Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 22 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 22 00 - Low-Voltage Transformers.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure with visible flexible copper grounding strap. 2. Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded. 3. Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1 ventilated. Furnish lifting eyes or brackets.
E. Fabrication: 1. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts. 2. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data.
2.3 AUTOTRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton, Schneider Electric. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry type autotransformers, ratings as indicated on Drawings.
C. Operation: 1. Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase. 2. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase. 3. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows: a. 10-15 kVA: Class 185 with 115 degrees C rise. b. 16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 150 degrees C rise. 4. Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point at full load. 5. Winding Taps: a. Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps on primary winding. b. Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20. 6. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. 7. Use three-legged core construction. 8. Mounting: a. 1-15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting. b. 16-75 kVA: Suitable for wall, or floor mounting. c. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.
D. Materials: 1. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible flexible copper grounding strap. 2. Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded. 3. Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1ventilated. Furnish lifting eyes or brackets.
E. Fabrication: 1. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts. 2. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data.
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Transformers Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 22 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 22 00 - Low-Voltage Transformers.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.4 BUCK-AND-BOOST TRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton, Schneider Electric, Cutler Hammer. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: NEMA ST 1, factory-assembled, dry type two winding buck and boost transformers, ratings as indicated on Drawings.
C. Operation: 1. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows: a. 0.25-2 kVA: Class 185 with 80 degrees C rise. b. 3-7.5 kVA: Class 220 with 80 degrees C rise. 2. Primary Voltage: 120 x 240 volts, single phase. 3. Secondary Voltage: 12/24 volts.
D. Materials: 1. Coil Conductors: copper Continuous windings. 2. Lugs: Suitable for terminating conductors sized for full load ampacity of transformer unit when operating in buck-and-boost configuration shown. 3. Enclosure: NEMA ST 1, Type 1.
E. Fabrication: a. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts. b. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.
B. Production test each unit according to NEMA ST20.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination.
B. Verify mounting supports are properly sized and located including concealed bracing in walls.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation preparation.
B. Provide concrete pads under provisions of Section 03 30 00.
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Transformers Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 22 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 22 00 - Low-Voltage Transformers.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.3 DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned transformers.
B. Maintain access and adequate ventilation to existing transformers and other installations remaining active and requiring access and ventilation. Modify installation or provide access panel or ventilation grilles.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Set transformer plumb and level.
B. Use flexible conduit, in accordance with Section 26 05 33, 2 feet minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
C. Support transformers in accordance with Section 26 05 29. 1. Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets furnished by manufacturer. 2. Mount floor-mounted transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating transformer noise from building structure. 3. Mount trapeze-mounted transformers as indicated on Drawings.
D. Provide seismic restraints.
E. Install grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. Requirements for inspecting and testing.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.2.1.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Clean existing transformers to remain or to be reinstalled.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Low-Voltage Transformers Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 22 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 22 00 - Low-Voltage Transformers.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution and branch circuit panelboards. 2. Electronic grade branch circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 3. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 4. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 5. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 6. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
C. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes 2. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards. 3. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures. 4. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
Hart Design Group Panelboards Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 24 16 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 24 16 - Panelboards.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
5. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 6. UL 1699 - Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
D. Field Quality Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor furnished tests and inspections.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance products.
B. Extra Stock Materials: 1. Furnish two of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Schneider Electric, Siemens, Eaton. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type panelboard.
Hart Design Group Panelboards Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 24 16 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 24 16 - Panelboards.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Materials 1. Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard. 2. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: UL 489, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Furnish circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. 3. Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Current Limiters: UL 489, circuit breakers with replaceable current limiting elements, in addition to integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. 4. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: UL 489, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let-through current and energy level less than permitted for same size NEMA FU 1, Class RK-5 fuse. 5. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated on Drawings.
D. Finishes 1. Manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Schneider Electric, Siemens, Eaton. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.
C. Materials: 1. Panelboard Bus: Copper. 2. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard. 3. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards. 4. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: UL 489, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers as indicated on Drawings. Provide UL class 760 arc-fault interrupter circuit breakers as indicated on Drawings. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. 5. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: UL 489, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let-through current and energy level less than permitted for same size NEMA FU 1, Class RK-5 fuse. 6. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 7. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide.
D. Cabinet Front: Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock keyed alike. Finishes:
Hart Design Group Panelboards Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 24 16 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 24 16 - Panelboards.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2.3 LOAD CENTERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Schneider Electric, Siemens, Eaton. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: Circuit breaker load center, with bus ratings as indicated on Drawings.
C. Performance: 1. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
D. Materials: 1. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: UL 489, plug-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. 2. Enclosure: General Purpose.
E. Box: Surface type with door, and lock on door.
F. Finishes 1. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect abandoned panelboards and load centers. Remove abandoned panelboards and load centers.
B. Maintain access to existing panelboard and load centers remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and load centers in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Install panelboards and load centers plumb.
C. Install recessed panelboards and load centers flush with wall finishes.
Hart Design Group Panelboards Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 24 16 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 24 16 - Panelboards.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard and load center; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor.
E. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
F. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard and load center. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads. Identify each circuit as to its clear, evident and specific purpose of use.
G. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
H. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE.
I. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.
D. Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.
E. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting.
B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Clean existing panelboards and load centers to remain or to be reinstalled.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Panelboards Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 24 16 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 24 16 - Panelboards.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 27 16
ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Hinged cover enclosures. 2. Cabinets. 3. Terminal blocks. 4. Accessories.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard data for enclosures, cabinets, and terminal blocks.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D. Qualification Statements: 1. Submit manufacturer experience qualifications. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance materials.
B. Extra Stock Materials: 1. Furnish two of each key.
Hart Design Group Electrical Cainets and Enclosures Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 27 16 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman, Carlon, and Leviton. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: NEMA 250, Type 1, and 3R steel enclosure. 1. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by screwdriver or key. 2. Furnish interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with white enamel. 3. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.2 CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: 1. Boxes: Galvanized steel. 2. Box Size: 24 inches wide x 6 inches deep. 3. Backboard: Furnish 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte white. 4. Fronts: Steel, flush type with concealed trim clamps, door with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard.
C. Fabrication 1. Furnish metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. 2. Furnish accessory feet for free-standing equipment.
D. Finishes: 1. Finish with gray baked enamel.
2.3 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Allen Bradley, Bussmann. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Hart Design Group Electrical Cainets and Enclosures Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 27 16 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Description: 1. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4. 2. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts. 3. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. 4. Furnish ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure.
2.4 PLASTIC RACEWAY
A. Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold, Panduit. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: Plastic channel with hinged or snap-on cover.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION
A. Remove abandoned cabinets and enclosures, including abandoned cabinets and enclosures above accessible ceiling finishes. Patch surfaces.
B. Maintain access to existing cabinets and enclosures and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
C. Extend existing cabinets and enclosures using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
B. Install cabinet fronts plumb.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean existing cabinets and enclosures to remain or to be reinstalled.
C. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials.
D. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
E. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
Hart Design Group Electrical Cainets and Enclosures Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 27 16 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Electrical Cainets and Enclosures Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 27 16 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles; multi outlet assembly; and device plates and decorative box covers.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems: Outlet boxes for wiring devices. 2. Section 26 05 34 - Floor Boxes for Electrical Systems: Service fittings for receptacles installed on floor boxes. 3. Section 26 05 34 - Floor Boxes for Electrical Systems: Poke-through receptacles.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL SWITCHES
A. Single Pole Switch
Hart Design Group Wiring Devices Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 27 26 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. Manufacturers: a. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Eaton. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Double Pole Switch 1. Manufacturers: a. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Eaton. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C. Three-Way Switch: 1. Manufacturers: a. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Eaton. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
D. Four-Way Switch: 1. Manufacturers: a. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Eaton. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 WALL DIMMERS
A. Manufacturers: a. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Eaton. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.3 RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers; Single Convenience Receptacle: a. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Eaton. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Manufacturers; Duplex Convenience Receptacle: a. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Eaton. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C. Manufacturers; GFCI Receptacle: a. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Eaton. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
D. Manufacturers; Hospital Use Receptacle: a. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Eaton. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Hart Design Group Wiring Devices Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 27 26 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.4 WALL PLATES
A. Manufacturers: a. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Eaton. b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
B. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates.
C. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.3 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned wiring devices.
B. Modify installation to maintain access to existing wiring devices to remain active.
C. Clean and repair existing wiring devices to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices plumb and level.
B. Install switches with OFF position down.
C. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.
D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
E. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
G. Install wall plates on flush mounted switches, receptacles, and blank outlets.
Hart Design Group Wiring Devices Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 27 26 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33 to obtain mounting heights as specified and as indicated on drawings.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect each wiring device for defects.
C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
D. Verify each receptacle device is energized.
E. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
F. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Wiring Devices Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 27 26 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 28 19
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible. 2. Nonfusible switches.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches and ratings of installed fuses.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
Hart Design Group Enclosed Switches Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 28 19 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 28 19 - Enclosed Switches.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton, Schneider Electric, Siemens, Leviton. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type GD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Operation: 1. Switch Ratings a. Switch Rating: Horsepower rated for AC or DC as indicated on Drawings. b. Short Circuit Current Rating: UL listed for 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30-600 ampere), 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses (30-600 ampere switches employing appropriate fuse rejection schemes).
D. Materials: 1. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R or J fuses. 2. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. a. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. c. Industrial Locations: Type 4X. d. Hazardous Locations: Type Class I, Division 2. 3. Service Entrance: Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. Furnish solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar. 4. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts.
2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton, Siemens, Schneider Electric, Leviton. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type GD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Operation: 1. Switch Ratings a. Switch Rating: Horsepower rated for AC or DC as indicated on Drawings. b. Short Circuit Current Rating: UL listed for 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30-600 ampere), 200,000 rms symmetrical
Hart Design Group Enclosed Switches Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 28 19 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 28 19 - Enclosed Switches.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
amperes when used with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses (30-600 ampere switches employing appropriate fuse rejection schemes).
D. Materials: 1. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. a. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. c. Industrial Locations: Type 4k. d. Hazardous Locations: Type Class I, Division 2. 2. Service Entrance: Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. Furnish solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar. 3. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned enclosed switches.
B. Maintain access to existing enclosed switches and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed switches where indicated.
B. Install enclosed switches plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
C. Height: 5 feet to operating handle.
D. Install fuses for fusible disconnect switches. Refer to Section 26 28 13 for product requirements.
E. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53. Engrave nameplates with the equipment served and the panel and circuit number supplying the switch.
F. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements Requirements for inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.
Hart Design Group Enclosed Switches Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 28 19 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 28 19 - Enclosed Switches.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.4 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Clean existing enclosed switches to remain or to be reinstalled.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Enclosed Switches Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 28 19 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 28 19 - Enclosed Switches.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 28 23
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes molded-case and insulated-case circuit breakers in individual enclosures.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit catalog sheets showing ratings, trip units, time current curves, dimensions, and enclosure details.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and continuous current ratings of enclosed circuit breakers.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
Hart Design Group Enclosed Circuit Breakers Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 28 23 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 28 23 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Furnish three of each size and type of current limiter.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton, Siemens, Schneider Electric. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Enclosed, molded-case circuit breaker conforming to UL 489.
C. Field-Adjustable Trip Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and larger have mechanism for adjusting long time, short time, continuous current, pickup current setting for automatic operation.
D. Field-Changeable Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and larger have changeable trip units.
E. Current Limiting Circuit Breaker: Circuit breaker indicated as current-limiting have automatically-resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Let-through Current and Energy: Less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse.
F. Solid-State Circuit Breaker: Electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings; instantaneous trip; and adjustable short time trip.
G. Current Limiter: Designed for application with molded case circuit breaker. 1. Coordinate limiter size with trip rating of circuit breaker to prevent nuisance tripping and to achieve interrupting current rating specified for circuit breaker. 2. Interlocks trip circuit breaker and prevent closing circuit breaker when limiter compartment cover is removed or when one or more limiter is not in place or has operated.
H. Accessories: As indicated on Drawings.
I. Enclosure: UL 489, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. 3. Industrial Locations: Type 4X.
J. Service Entrance: Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. Furnish solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar.
2.2 INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
A. Manufacturers: 1. Siemens, Schneider Electric.
Hart Design Group Enclosed Circuit Breakers Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 28 23 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 28 23 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Enclosed, insulated-case circuit breaker conforming to UL 489.
C. Trip Unit: Electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings; instantaneous trip; and adjustable short time trip.
D. Accessories: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Enclosure: UL 489, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. 3. Industrial Locations: Type 4X.
F. Service Entrance: Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. Furnish solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned enclosed circuit breakers.
B. Maintain access to existing enclosed circuit breakers and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
C. Clean and repair existing enclosed circuit breakers to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
B. Height: 5 feet to operating handle.
C. Install grounding and bonding in accordance with requirements of Section 26 05 26.
D. Locate and install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1.
Hart Design Group Enclosed Circuit Breakers Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 28 23 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 28 23 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Adjust trip settings to coordinate circuit breakers with other overcurrent protective devices in circuit.
C. Adjust trip settings to provide adequate protection from overcurrent and fault currents.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Enclosed Circuit Breakers Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 28 23 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 28 23 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 54 16 - Luminous Ceilings. 2. Section 09 58 00 - Integrated Ceiling Assemblies. 3. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets: For interface with air handling fixtures. 4. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 6. Section 26 52 00 - Emergency Lighting.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast. 2. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts-for High-Intensity- Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard product of manufacturer.
C. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
Hart Design Group Interior Lighting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 51 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 51 00 - Interior Lighting.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Furnish two of each plastic lens type.
C. Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp installed.
D. Furnish two of each driver type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
A. Product Description: Complete interior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as scheduled.
B. Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for product options.
2.2 LED Electronic Drivers
A. Manufacturers: 1. Philips, Lithonia. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Electronic LED Driver, instant start, less than 10 percent THD suitable for lamps specified, with voltage to match luminaire voltage.
2.3 LED LAMPS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Philips, Lithonia. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.4 HAZARDOUS LOCATION FIXTURES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Indatech Lighting 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Heavy-duty fixture suitable for Class I, Div. 2 Groups A, B, C, & D. Electronic LED Driver and LED modules contained in a formed and welded aluminum housing and door frame with an impact resistant polycarbonate lens.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires, lamps, and accessories.
Hart Design Group Interior Lighting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 51 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 51 00 - Interior Lighting.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
B. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing.
C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on Drawings.
D. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface-mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure. Fasten surface mounted luminaires to ceiling grid members using bolts, screws, rivets, or suitable clips.
F. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
G. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.
H. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
I. Install wall-mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Drawings.
J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
K. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 26 05 33 using flexible conduit.
L. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire.
M. Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
N. Ground and bond interior luminaires in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Hart Design Group Interior Lighting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 51 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 51 00 - Interior Lighting.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated on Drawings.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.
B. Relamp luminaires having failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Interior Lighting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 51 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 51 00 - Interior Lighting.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 26 52 00
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes emergency lighting units and exit signs.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting: Exit signs.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Emergency lighting to comply with requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp installed.
C. Furnish one replacement battery for each battery type and size.
Hart Design Group Emergency Lighting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 52 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 52 00 - Emergency Lighting.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Emergi Lite. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Self-contained LED emergency lighting unit.
C. Battery: 12 volt, lead calcium type, with 1.5 hour capacity.
D. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours.
E. Lamps: LED.
F. Remote Fixtures: Match fixtures on unit.
G. Housing: Steel with gray hammer tone finish.
H. Indicators: Lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING.
I. TEST switch: Transfers unit from external power supply to integral battery supply.
J. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection.
K. Input Voltage: 120-277 volts.
2.2 EXIT SIGNS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Emergi Lite. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Exit sign fixture.
C. Housing: Sheet steel.
D. Face: plastic face with red letters on white background
E. Directional Arrows: As indicated on Drawings.
F. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Battery: 12 volt, lead calcium type, with 1.5 hour capacity.
Hart Design Group Emergency Lighting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 52 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 52 00 - Emergency Lighting.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
H. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours.
I. Lamps: LED, 5 W per side, maximum.
J. Input Voltage: 120-277 volts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned emergency lighting units, exit signs, lamps, and accessories.
B. Extend existing emergency lighting and exit sign installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install suspended exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend sign at indicated height.
B. Install surface-mounted emergency lighting units and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
C. Install wall-mounted emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings.
D. Install accessories furnished with each emergency lighting unit and exit sign.
E. Connect emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided in Section 26 05 33 or as indicated on Drawings.
F. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within unit.
G. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit and exit sign.
H. Ground and bond emergency lighting units and exit signs in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Operate each unit after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Hart Design Group Emergency Lighting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 52 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 52 00 - Emergency Lighting.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Aim and adjust lamp fixtures as indicated on Drawings.
C. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated on Drawings.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.
B. Relamp emergency lighting units and exit signs having failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Emergency Lighting Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 52 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\26 52 00 - Emergency Lighting.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 27 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Wire. 2. Mechanical connectors. 3. Exothermic connections.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc. 1. BICSI TDM Manual - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual.
B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
C. Telecommunication Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance: 1. TIA/EIA 607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Communications grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes: 1. Building grounding electrode.
B. Do not use the following elements as grounding electrodes: 1. Building plumbing system.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms maximum.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections.
C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground.
Hart Design Group Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 26 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide grounding, surge protection and lightning protection of telecommunications system in accordance with latest version of Grounding, Bonding and Electrical Protection chapter of the BICSI TDM Manual, TIA/EIA 607, and NFPA 70.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.
C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRE
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Grounding Conductor: Copper conductor bare.
Hart Design Group Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 26 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor bare.
2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Harger Grounding and Lightning, Burndy. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation.
2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Harger Grounding and Lightning, Burndy. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and making permanent field connections between grounding system components.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove paint, rust, mill oils, and surface contaminants at connection points.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 70.
B. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.
C. Install grounding for each rack using 6 AWG THHN, rated for 90 degrees C, insulated, copper stranded conductor to copper communication grounding bus bar located in main telecommunications entrance facility.
D. Bond main telecommunications grounding system to building grounding electrode system at main electrical service entrance location with 6 AWG THHN, rated for 90 degrees C, insulated, copper stranded conductor.
E. Install routing for grounding conductor as short and direct as practical.
F. Install routing of bonding conductors with minimum number of bends and splices. Use sweeping bends.
G. Install bonding connections with listed bolts, crimp pressure connectors, clamps, or lugs. Exothermic welding may be used.
Hart Design Group Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 26 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
H. Between each Telcom room, install multiple busbars directly bonded with 6 AWG copper conductor.
I. Position busbars near associated equipment and insulate from supports.
J. Construct busbars of copper, 4 inches x 8 inches by 1/4 inch thick with pilot holes for ground lug.
K. Bond backbone cabling at each sheath opening.
L. Ground data cabinets, racks, cable trays, and mounting hardware located in IDF Room.
M. Install ground from each piece of equipment to IDF Room grounding bar via an insulated cable no smaller than 6 AWG stranded copper wire. Install proper grounding lug on cable where connecting to racks and grounding bar.
N. Label grounding conductors and grounding bus bars in accordance with Section 27 05 53.
O. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Visually inspect from each bus bar to main grounding electrode service location.
C. Test in accordance with BICSI TDM Manual, and NFPA 70.
D. When improper grounding is found, check entire project and correct. Perform retest.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 26 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 27 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Spring steel clips. 4. Sleeves. 5. Mechanical sleeve seals. 6. Firestopping relating to communications work. 7. Firestopping accessories. 8. Equipment bases and supports.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Product requirements for concrete for placement by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
B. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.
C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 29 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Firestopping Materials: UL 263, and UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating.
B. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Firestopping: Conform to UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.
C. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.
E. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of hangers and supports.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
H. Firestopping Engineering Judgments: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgments by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. 1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 29 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion. 1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories. 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.
C. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly.
D. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
E. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.
C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F.
C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials.
D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 29 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon, Thomas & Betts, or Unistrut. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads.
C. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel.
D. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten.
E. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits.
F. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F. Self locking.
2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut, B-Line. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.
2.3 SPRING STEEL CLIPS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut, B-Line. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Mounting hole and screw closure.
2.4 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
C. Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
2.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Manufacturers:
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 29 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1. 3M Fire Protection Products, Hilti, Inc., STI Firestop. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application.
1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: [Single] [Multiple] component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: [Single] [Multiple] component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of [mineral] [ceramic] fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.
2.6 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.
B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. 4. Plywood or particle board. 5. Alumina silicate fire board.
C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.
D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.
E. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 29 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C. Install damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
D. Obtain permission from Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E. Do not drill or cut structural members.
3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts, expansion anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring steel clips, and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws.
B. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
C. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC.
D. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
E. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 29 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
F. Supports: 1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. 2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. 4. Support vertical conduit at every floor.
3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING
A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.
B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating.
D. Fire Rated Surface: 1. Seal opening at floor, wall, ceiling, and roof as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. c. Pack void with backing material. d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. 2. Where cable tray, conduit, wireway, and trough penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, floor, ceiling, and roof opening as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling. 3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical seal to size of conduit and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at laboratories, computer rooms, telecommunication rooms, and data rooms. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 29 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.5 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 03 30 00.
B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct supports of steel members or formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
3.6 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES
A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links.
B. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam.
C. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
E. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
F. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
G. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing.
B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 29 - 8 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 29 - 9 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 27 05 33
CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections. 2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 34 - Floor Boxes for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures. 6. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. 7. Section 27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems. 8. Section 27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems. 9. Section 27 05 36 - Cable Trays for Communications Systems. 10. Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 5. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 6. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system.
Hart Design Group Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 33 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Underground More than 5 feet outside Foundation Wall: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal boxes or nonmetallic handhole.
C. Underground Within 5 feet from Foundation Wall: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic boxes.
D. In or Under Slab on Grade: Provide thin-wall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast or nonmetallic metal boxes.
E. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid steel. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
F. In Slab Above Grade: Provide electrical metallic tubing and thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast boxes.
G. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
H. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
I. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit for the following: 1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Nonmetallic conduit. 4. Flexible nonmetallic conduit. 5. Nonmetallic tubing. 6. Raceway fittings. 7. Conduit bodies. 8. Surface raceway. 9. Wireway. 10. Pull and junction boxes. 11. Handholes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
Hart Design Group Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 33 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inch. 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 05 03.
B. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Wheatland Tube Company, Thomas & Betts, Allied Tube & Conduit. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
D. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
2.2 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire Company, AFC Cable.
Hart Design Group Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 33 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.3 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire, AFC Cable Systems, Carlon. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon, Wheatland Tube Company.. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron, compression type.
2.5 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon, EGS/Appleton Electric. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
2.6 NONMETALLIC TUBING
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: NEMA TC 2.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
Hart Design Group Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 33 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.7 WIREWAY
A. Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold, Hoffman, B-Line. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: General purpose type wireway.
C. Knockouts: Manufacturer's standard.
2.8 OUTLET BOXES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon, Emerson Electric. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.
C. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
D. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer.
E. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26.
F. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover.
2.9 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman, Hubbell. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
C. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 27 16.
D. Fiberglass Handholes: Die-molded, glass-fiber hand holes: 1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 inch x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side. 2. Cover: Glass-fiber, weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.
Hart Design Group Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 33 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
3.3 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY
A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system.
B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29.
E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports
F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29.
H. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.
I. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
K. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade: 3/4 inch. Do not cross conduits in slab.
L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.
M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.
N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
Hart Design Group Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 33 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
P. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.
Q. Install conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.
R. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
S. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
T. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses control and expansion joints.
U. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.
V. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
W. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
X. Close ends and unused openings in wireway.
3.4 INSTALLATION - BOXES
A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as specified in section for outlet device.
B. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.
C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26.
D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
F. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches separation.
G. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
H. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
Hart Design Group Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 33 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
I. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
J. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
K. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
L. Support boxes independently of conduit.
M. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
N. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 07 84 00.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket.
C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings.
D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 33 - 8 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 27 05 36
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cable tray.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. 2. Section 27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems. 3. Section 27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FG 1 - Nonmetallic Cable Tray Systems. 2. NEMA VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems. 3. NEMA VE 2 - Metal Cable Tray Installation Guidelines.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes.
C. Product Data: Submit fittings and accessories.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations of supports.
Hart Design Group Cable Trays for Communication Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 36 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 36 - Cable Trays for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY
A. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line, Schneider Electric, Legrand. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C ladder type tray.
C. Material: Steel.
D. Finish: Galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M.
E. Inside Width: 6 inches.
F. Inside Depth: 3 inches.
G. Straight Section Rung Spacing: 6 inches on center.
H. Inside Radius of Fittings: 12 inches.
I. Furnish manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps.
J. Covers: flush cover.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS
A. Engraved Nameplates: 1/2 inch black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate, engraved with: WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Maintain access to existing cable tray and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
Hart Design Group Cable Trays for Communication Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 36 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 36 - Cable Trays for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Extend existing cable tray installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations.
C. Clean and repair existing cable tray to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2.
B. Install fiberglass cable tray in accordance with NEMA FG 1.
C. Support trays and fasten to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 27 05 29.
D. Install expansion connectors where recommended by manufacturer.
E. Install firestopping in accordance with Section 27 05 29 to sustain ratings when passing cable tray through fire-rated elements.
F. Ground and bond metal cable tray in accordance with Section 27 05 26.
G. Install warning signs at 10 feet centers along cable tray, located to be visible.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Cable Trays for Communication Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 36 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 36 - Cable Trays for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 27 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Conduit markers. 5. Stencils. 6. Underground Warning Tape. 7. Lockout Devices.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required. 2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
Hart Design Group Identification for Communication Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 53 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.
C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.
D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Install labels or nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white background color.
C. Letter Size: 1. 1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4 inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
D. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch.
2.2 LABELS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Hart Design Group Identification for Communication Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 53 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background.
2.3 WIRE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady ID, Ideal Industries. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: tubing type wire markers.
C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams.
2.4 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady ID, Seton, Ideal Industries. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: Labels fastened with adhesive.
C. Color: 1. Telephone System: Blue lettering on white background.
D. Legend: 1. Telephone System: TELEPHONE.
2.5 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton, Brady ID. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.
Hart Design Group Identification for Communication Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 53 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.
B. Nameplate Installation: 1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive. 5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panels in finished locations.
C. Label Installation: 1. Install label parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations. 3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
D. Wire Marker Installation: 1. Install wire marker for each conductor at pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes. 2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run. 3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation.
E. Conduit Marker Installation: 1. Install conduit marker for each conduit longer than 6 feet. 2. Conduit Marker Spacing: 20 feet on center.
F. Underground Warning Tape Installation: 1. Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Identification for Communication Systems Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 05 53 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 27 13 43
COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES CABLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes termination devices, outlets, and premises wiring.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting backboards. 2. Section 26 05 21 – Under carpet Cable. 3. Section 26 05 34 - Floor Boxes for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 27 23 - Indoor Service Poles. 5. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates. 6. Section 27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems. 7. Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems. 8. Section 27 05 36 - Cable Trays for Communications Systems. 9. Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems. 10. Section 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
C. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance: 1. TIA/EIA 568 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 2. TIA/EIA 569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: 1. UL 2043 - Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal Pathway: Conform to TIA/EIA 569, using raceway, and cabinets as indicated on Drawings.
Hart Design Group Communications Services Cabling Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 13 43 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 13 43 - Communications Services Cabling.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit catalog data for each termination device, cable, and outlet device.
C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field testing and inspection.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5, average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m) when tested in accordance with NFPA 262.
B. Provide combustible electrical equipment exposed within plenums with peak rate of heat release not greater than 100 kW, peak optical density not greater than 0.5, and average optical density not greater than 0.15 when tested in accordance with UL 2043.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in installing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Testing Agency: Company specializing in testing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish two telephone outlet jacks.
C. Furnish five Data Outlet Jacks
Hart Design Group Communications Services Cabling Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 13 43 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 13 43 - Communications Services Cabling.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with utility company, relocation of overhead of underground lines interfering with construction. Where power lines are to be relocated, bill utility costs directly to Owner.
B. Contact utility company regarding charges related to service installation. Include utility charges in this contract.
C. Utility charges for service installation paid by Owner and are not part of this contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS
A. Material: Fire retardant Plywood.
B. Size: As indicated on Drawings, 3/4 inch thick.
2.2 DATA TERMINATION CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Siemon. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Galvanized steel box with removable end walls, 23.6 inches wide, 79.4 inches high, 47.2 inches deep.
C. Cabinet Fronts: Steel type, concealed hinge, and flush lock.
D. Finish: Black baked enamel.
2.3 PATCH PANEL
A. Manufacturers: 1. Siemon. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, rack-mounted assembly of terminals and accessory patch cords, with adequate capacity for active and spare circuits.
2.4 TELEPHONE OUTLET JACKS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Siemon. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Hart Design Group Communications Services Cabling Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 13 43 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 13 43 - Communications Services Cabling.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Product Description: Conform to TIA/EIA 568 requirements for cable connectors for specific cable types.
2.5 UNSHIELDED BACKBONE CABLE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Belden, Mohawk, Superior. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, 100-ohm, unshielded twisted pair cable with 25 pairs, 22 AWG copper conductor.
2.6 SHIELDED BACKBONE CABLE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Belden, Mohawk, Superior. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, 150-ohm shielded, twisted-pair cable with 2 pairs, 24 AWG copper conductor.
2.7 UNSHIELDED HORIZONTAL CABLE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Belden, Mohawk, Superior. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, 100-ohm, CAT 6, unshielded twisted pair cable with 4 pairs, 24 AWG copper conductor.
2.8 SHIELDED HORIZONTAL CABLE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Belden, Mohawk, Superior. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, 150-ohm, CAT 6 shielded, twisted-pair cable with 2 pairs, 24 AWG copper conductor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned telecommunications cables and pathways, including abandoned cables and pathways above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
Hart Design Group Communications Services Cabling Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 13 43 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 13 43 - Communications Services Cabling.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Disconnect and remove abandoned telecommunications equipment.
C. Maintain access to existing telecommunications equipment, cabling, and terminations and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install pathways in accordance with TIA/EIA 569.
B. Install wire and cable in accordance with TIA/EIA 568.
C. Install pull wire in each empty telephone conduit over 10 feet in length or containing bends.
D. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 27 05 53.
E. Ground and bond pathways, cable shields, and equipment in accordance with Section 27 05 26.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect and test optical fiber cables in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.25.
C. Inspect and test copper cables and terminations in accordance with TIA/EIA 568.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Communications Services Cabling Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 27 13 43 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\27 13 43 - Communications Services Cabling.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 28 31 00
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-alarm control panels. 2. Manual fire-alarm stations. 3. Automatic smoke and heat detectors. 4. Fire-alarm signaling appliances. 5. Auxiliary fire-alarm equipment. 6. Power and signal wire and cable.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Door closers, electric locks, electric releases. 2. Section 21 12 00 - Fire-Suppression Standpipes: Flow detection and alarm devices. 3. Section 21 13 13 - Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems: Flow detection and alarm devices. 4. Section 21 13 16 - Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems: Flow detection and alarm devices. 5. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Smoke dampers: HVAC duct dampers and instrumentation. 6. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Building wire and cable. 7. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Grounding and bonding of fire-alarm equipment and circuits. 8. Section 28 05 53 - Identification for Electronic Safety and Security: Engraved plastic nameplates.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. 2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
B. UL: 1. UL 268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with Work of other Sections.
Hart Design Group Fire Detection and Alarm Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 31 00 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring connections. 2. Indicate annunciator layout.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Delegated Design Submittals: Submit signed and sealed Shop Drawings with design calculations and assumptions for fire-alarm system.
F. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit detailed instructions on installation requirements, including storage and handling procedures.
G. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.
H. Manufacturer Reports: 1. Certify that equipment has been installed according to manufacturer instructions. 2. Indicate activities on Site, adverse findings, and recommendations.
I. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer, installer, and licensed professional. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of fire-alarm equipment.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance materials.
B. Extra Stock Materials: 1. Furnish 1 manual-station. 2. Furnish 2 keys of each type provided.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wiring Materials Located in Plenums: 1. Peak Optical Density: Not greater than 0.5.
Hart Design Group Fire Detection and Alarm Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 31 00 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2. Average Optical Density: Not greater than 0.15. 3. Flame Spread: Not greater than 5 feet when tested according to NFPA 262.
B. Maintain 1 copies of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years' documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage.
C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.
D. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.
1.10 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fire-Alarm System: 1. Automatic local fire-alarm system with connections to municipal system central station. 2. Comply with NFPA 72.
B. Alarm Sequence of Operation: 1. Actuation of initiating device causes following system operations: a. Local fire-alarm signaling devices sound and display, with signal. b. Signal transmits to central station. c. Location of alarm zone indicates on fire-alarm control panel and on remote annunciator panel.
Hart Design Group Fire Detection and Alarm Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 31 00 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
d. Signal transmits to building mechanical controls, shutting down fans and operating dampers. e. Signal transmits to release door hold-open devices. f. Signal releases magnetic door hold-open devices. g. Signal releases electric door locks.
C. Drill Sequence of Operation: Manual drill function causes alarm mode sequence of operation.
D. Trouble Sequence of Operation: 1. System or circuit trouble causes following system operations: a. Visual and audible trouble alarm annunciates at fire-alarm control panel. b. Visual and audible trouble alarm annunciates at remote annunciator panel. c. Trouble signal transmits to central station.
2.2 CONTROL PANELS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Simplex 2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Power Supply: 1. Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote annunciators, smoke dampers and alarm signaling devices.
C. System Supervision: Failure of component or power supply places system in trouble mode.
D. Initiating Device Circuits: 1. Furnish supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication. 2. Occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable circuit from initiating alarm.
E. Indicating Appliance Circuits: 1. Furnish supervised signal module, sufficient for signal devices connected to system. 2. Occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable circuit from signaling alarm.
F. Auxiliary Relays: Sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts to provide accessory functions specified.
2.3 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM STATIONS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Simpex. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Description: Manual double-action station with break-glass rod.
C. Mounting: Surface.
Hart Design Group Fire Detection and Alarm Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 31 00 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
D. Type: Coded.
E. Backbox: Manufacturer's standard.
2.4 SPOT HEAT DETECTORS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Simplex. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Description: Combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature, spot heat detector.
C. Temperature Rating: 135 degrees F.
D. Rate of Rise: 15 degrees F.
2.5 DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Simplex. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Description: 1. Type: Ionization. 2. Comply with NFPA 72 and UL 268A. 3. Furnish auxiliary SPDT relay contact. 4. NORMAL-RESET-TEST Switch: Key operated. 5. Duct Sampling Tubes: Extend width of duct. 6. Furnish visual indication of detector actuation. 7. Housing: Duct mounted.
C. Furnish four-wire detector with separate power supply and signal circuits.
2.6 ALARM LIGHTS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Simplex. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Description: 1. Furnish strobe lamp and flasher with red-lettered designation FIRE on white lens. 2. Comply with NFPA 72.
2.7 ALARM HORNS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Simplex. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
Hart Design Group Fire Detection and Alarm Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 31 00 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Description: 1. Type: Surface. 2. Comply with NFPA 72. 3. Sound Rating: 87 dB at 10 feet. 4. Furnish integral strobe lamp and flasher with red-lettered FIRE on white lens.
2.8 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Belden, Advanced Digital Cable. 2. Substitutions: As specified in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: 1. Non-power-limited, fire-protective signaling cable. 2. Conductor: Copper. 3. Insulation Rating: 150 V at 60 degrees C.
C. Cable Located Exposed in Plenums: 1. Power-limited, fire-protective signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics. 2. Conductor: Copper. 3. Insulation Rating: 300 V at 105 degrees C. 4. Suitable for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.
D. Fire-Alarm Circuit Conductors per code.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination.
B. Verify that products and systems receiving devices are ready for installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation preparation.
B. Existing Work: 1. Remove exposed abandoned fire-alarm wiring, including abandoned wiring above accessible ceiling finishes. 2. Cut cable flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. 3. Disconnect and remove abandoned fire-alarm equipment. 4. Access: a. Maintain access to existing fire-alarm equipment and other installations remaining active and requiring access.
Hart Design Group Fire Detection and Alarm Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 31 00 - 6 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
b. Modify installation or provide access panel. 5. Extend existing fire-alarm installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations. 6. Clean and repair existing fire-alarm equipment that is to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install manual station with operating handle 4 feet above operating floor.
B. Install audible and visual signal devices 7-1/2 feet above operating floor.
C. Install 16-AWG minimum size conductors for fire-alarm detection and signal circuit conductors in conduit.
D. Mount end-of-line devices in control panel.
E. Mount outlet box for electric door holder in a manner to withstand 80 lb of pulling force.
F. Connect conduit and wire to door release devices, sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression system control panels, and duct smoke detectors, and.
G. Automatic Detector Installation: Comply with NFPA 72.
H. Install engraved plastic nameplates as specified in Section 28 05 53 - Identification for Electronic Safety and Security.
I. Ground and bond fire-alarm equipment and circuits as specified in Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.
B. Test fire detection and alarm devices and systems according to NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements.
C. Manufacturer Services: Furnish services of certified manufacturer's representative experienced in installation of products furnished under this Section for not less than4 hours on Site for installation, inspection, startup, field testing, adjustments, and instructing Owner's personnel in maintenance of equipment.
D. Equipment Acceptance: 1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun tests. 2. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of manufacturer's representative.
E. Furnish installation certificate from equipment manufacturer's representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing.
Hart Design Group Fire Detection and Alarm Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 31 00 - 7 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm.DOC R & D Lab Renovations – 800BTPK June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.
B. Demonstrate equipment startup, shutdown, routine maintenance, and emergency repair procedures to Owner's personnel.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.
B. Provide service and maintenance of fire-alarm equipment for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Fire Detection and Alarm Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 26 31 00 - 8 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\ELEC\word\Rev 0\28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm.DOC CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 31 05 13 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Subsoil materials. 2. Topsoil materials.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 4. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements 5. Section 31 23 23 - Fill.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Note: All referenced codes to be latest version unless noted otherwise.
B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials: 1. AASHTO T180 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb Rammer and an 18-in. Drop.
C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 2. ASTM D422 - Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils 3. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3). 4. ASTM D1140 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Amount of Material Finer than No. 200 Sieve in Soils by Washing. 5. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3). 6. ASTM D2487 – Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 7. ASTM D5268 - Standard Specification for Top Soil used for Landscaping and Construction Purposes
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
Hart Design Group Soil for Earthwork Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 31 05 13 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\31 05 13 - Soils for Earthwork Rev 0.doc CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 10 lb. sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory.
C. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials source.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish each material from single source throughout the Work.
B. Perform Work in accordance with State and Municipal Highways and Public Work's standards, whichever is more stringent
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSOIL MATERIALS
A. Structural/Gravel Fill 1. Structural fill shall be a gravel-sand mixture free of organic or other unsatisfactory material. 2. Structural Fill shall contain no rocks or stones larger than 3”. 3. Structural Fill shall contain no more than 10 percent passing the No. 200 Sieve as measured by ASTM Standards C136, D422, and D1140.
B. Crushed Stone 1. Crushed stone shall be free of organic or other unsatisfactory material. 2. Maximum aggregate size shall be ¾”. 3. Structural Fill shall contain no more than 0.5 percent passing the No. 200 Sieve as measured by ASTM Standards C136, D422, and D1140.
2.2 TOPSOIL MATERIALS
A. Topsoil/Loam 1. Imported borrow. 2. Friable loam. 3. Reasonably free of roots, rocks larger than ½ inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds, and foreign matter. a. Screening: Single screened. 4. Acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5 5. Containing minimum of 4 percent and maximum of 25 percent inorganic matter.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services: Testing and analysis of soil material.
Hart Design Group Soil for Earthwork Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 31 05 13 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\31 05 13 - Soils for Earthwork Rev 0.doc CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Testing and Analysis of Subsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM C136, ASTM D422, ASTM D698, ASTM D1140, ASTM D1557, AASHTO T180.
C. Testing and Analysis of Topsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM D5268
D. When tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.
E. Furnish materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Soil for Earthwork Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 31 05 13 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\31 05 13 - Soils for Earthwork Rev 0.doc CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 31 23 16 EXCAVATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Soil densification. 2. Excavating for building foundations. 3. Excavating for slabs-on-grade. 4. Excavating for site structures. 5. Excavating for landscaping.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 4. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 5. Section 31 05 13 - Soils for Earthwork: Stockpiling excavated materials. 6. Section 31 23 23 - Fill.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. State and local utility standards when working within 24 inches of utility lines.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property; include structural calculations to support plan.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with State and Municipal Highways and Public Work's standards, whichever is more stringent.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Prepare excavation protection plan under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Massachusetts.
Hart Design Group Excavation Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 31 23 16 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\31 23 16 - Excavation, Rev 0.doc CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Call Local Utility Line Information service, Dig Safe, not less than three working days before performing Work. 1. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding construction areas. 2. Contact non-member utilities. 3. Maintain marking.
B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
C. Protect utilities indicated to remain from damage.
D. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as Part of final landscaping.
E. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work. Submit methods in Excavation Protection Plan for approval.
B. Excavate subsoil to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving, and, site structures, construction operations, and perimeter drainage.
C. Excavate to working elevation for piling work.
D. Compact disturbed load bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to original bearing capacity; perform compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 23 and Section 31 23 17.
E. Slope banks with machine to 34 degree angle (Type C) or less until shored, unless soil Type A, B, or D is confirmed.
F. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
G. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.
H. Trim excavation. Remove loose matter.
Hart Design Group Excavation Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 31 23 16 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\31 23 16 - Excavation, Rev 0.doc CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
I. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd. measured by volume. Remove larger material as specified in Section 31 23 23.
J. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions.
K. Correct areas over excavated with structural fill specified in Section 31 23 23 or as directed by Architect/Engineer.
L. Remove excess and unsuitable material from site or stockpile on site. Review requirements with Rhodes EH&S department prior to starting excavation work.
M. Repair or replace items indicated to remain damaged by excavation.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Perform inspection of excavation operations in accordance by the contractor’s Professional Engineer responsible for the Excavation Protection Plan.
C. Request testing and inspection of controlled fill operations by the Owner’s Testing and Inspection Agency.
D. Request visual inspection of bearing surfaces by Engineer before installing subsequent work.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.
B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.
C. Protect structures, utilities and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth operations.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Excavation Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 31 23 16 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\31 23 16 - Excavation, Rev 0.doc CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 31 23 23 FILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Backfilling building perimeter to subgrade elevations. 2. Backfilling site structures to subgrade elevations. 3. Fill under slabs-on-grade. 4. Fill under paving. 5. Fill for over-excavation.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 4. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 5. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete materials. 6. Section 31 05 13 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for fill. 7. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Note: All referenced codes to be latest version unless noted otherwise.
B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials: 1. AASHTO T180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb Rammer and an 18-in. Drop.
C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3). 2. ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. 3. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3). 4. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. 5. ASTM D6938 Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
Hart Design Group Fill Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 31 23 23 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\31 23 23 - Fill, Rev 0.doc CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Product Data: Submit data for geotextile fabric indicating fabric and construction.
C. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 10 lb. sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory.
D. Materials Source: Submit name of imported fill materials suppliers.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with State and Municipal Highways and Public Work's standards, whichever is more stringent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIALS
A. Structural Fill as specified in Section 31 05 13.
B. Crushed Stone as specified in Section 31 05 13.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, non-woven US135NW manufactured by US Fabrics.
B. Substitutions: Submit for approval.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify subdrainage or waterproofing installation has been inspected.
C. Verify underground tanks and drainage structures are anchored to their own foundations to avoid flotation after backfilling.
D. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support loads imposed by fill.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.
Hart Design Group Fill Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 31 23 23 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\31 23 23 - Fill, Rev 0.doc CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with structural fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.
C. Proof roll to identify soft spots; fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.
3.3 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.
B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
C. Place geotextile fabric as shown on the Contract Drawings.
D. Place material in continuous layers as follows: 1. Subsoil Fill: Maximum 8 inches compacted depth. 2. Structural Fill: Maximum 8 inches compacted depth. 3. Granular Fill: Maximum 8 inches compacted depth.
E. Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.
F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
G. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls, or containment structure walls.
H. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.
I. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 percent slope for minimum distance of 10 ft, unless noted otherwise.
J. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.
K. Remove surplus backfill materials from site. Review material stockpiling and removal requirements with Rhodes EH&S Department.
L. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Top Surface of Backfilling within Building Areas: Plus or minus ½ inch from required elevations.
Hart Design Group Fill Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 31 23 23 - 3 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\31 23 23 - Fill, Rev 0.doc CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
C. Top Surface of Backfilling under Paved Areas and Concrete Slabs: Plus or minus ½ inch from required elevations.
D. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements; 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Perform laboratory material tests in accordance with ASTM D1557, ASTM D698, and AASHTO T180.
C. Perform in place compaction tests in accordance with the following: 1. Density Tests: ASTM D1556 or ASTM D6938. 2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D6938.
D. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.
E. Frequency of Tests: One per 1000 square feet per lift or one per 50 linear feet per lift. Stagger test locations each lift.
F. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces prior to proceeding with subsequent work.
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.
B. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
3.7 SCHEDULE
A. Interior Slab-On-Grade: 1. Fill Type: Structural Fill, 8 inch thick lifts, compacted to 98 percent.
B. Exterior Side of Foundation Walls, Retaining Walls: 1. Fill Type: Structural Fill to subgrade elevation, 8-inch thick lifts, compact uniformly to 95 percent of maximum density.
C. Fill Under Grass/Landscape Areas: 1. Fill Type: Gravel Fill, to 6 inches below finish grade, compact uniformly to 90 percent of maximum density.
D. Fill Under Asphalt/Concrete Paving: 1. Compact subsoil to 95 percent of its maximum dry density. 2. Fill Type: Gravel Fill, to below finish paving elevation, compact uniformly to 95 percent of maximum density.
Hart Design Group Fill Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 31 23 23 - 4 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\31 23 23 - Fill, Rev 0.doc CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
E. Fill to Correct Over-excavation: 1. Fill Type: Structural Fill, flush to required elevation, compact uniformly to 98 percent of maximum density.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Fill Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 31 23 23 - 5 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\31 23 23 - Fill, Rev 0.doc
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
SECTION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Preparation of subsoil. 2. Soil tesing. 3. Placing topsoil.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching: Rough grading over cut. 2. Section 32 91 19 - Landscape Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the Work of this section. 3. Section 32 92 19 - Seeding
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Submit minimum 10 oz sample of topsoil proposed. Forward sample to approved testing laboratory in sealed containers to prevent contamination.
C. Test Reports: Indicate topsoil nutrient and pH levels with recommended soil supplements and application rates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Massachusetts Highways standard.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 – Submittal Procedures: Requirements for coordination.
B. Coordinate with installation of underground electrcial conduit and utility piping.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: As specified in Section 31 05 13 Soils for Earthquake.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Edging: Plastic.
Hart Design Group Soil Preparation Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 32 91 13 - 1 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\32 91 13 - Soil Preparation, Rev 0.doc
CLD & CCM Labs – Shrewsbury June 21, 2021 Cytiva PROJECT INDIGO Rev. 0 HDG Project No.: 20021B
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.
B. Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt content, organic matter content, and pH value.
C. Provide recommendation for fertilizer and lime application rates for specified seed mix as result of testing.
D. Testing is not required when recent tests and certificates are available for imported topsoil. Submit these test results to testing laboratory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 – Submittal Procedures: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify prepared soil base is ready to receive the Work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL
A. Prepare sub-soil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain lines, levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.
B. Remove foreign materials, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove contaminated sub-soil.
C. Scarify subsoil to depth of 3 inches where topsoil is to be placed. Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted sub-soil.
3.3 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Spread topsoil to minimum depth of 6 inches over area to be seeded. Rake until smooth.
B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade.
C. Remove vegetable matter and foreign non-organic material from topsoil while spreading.
D. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage.
E. Install edging at periphery of seeded areas in straight lines to consistent depth.
END OF SECTION
Hart Design Group Soil Preparation Cumberland, Rhode Island 02864 32 91 13 - 2 H:\20021_B_Cytiva_Shrews Det Design\Specs\Civil\32 91 13 - Soil Preparation, Rev 0.doc